WO2021212564A1 - 空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统 - Google Patents

空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021212564A1
WO2021212564A1 PCT/CN2020/089684 CN2020089684W WO2021212564A1 WO 2021212564 A1 WO2021212564 A1 WO 2021212564A1 CN 2020089684 W CN2020089684 W CN 2020089684W WO 2021212564 A1 WO2021212564 A1 WO 2021212564A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
water
air
water tank
purification device
air purification
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/089684
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
刘祥宇
王宁
矫立涛
袁小辉
张展
石衡
汪鹏飞
李向凯
魏传超
Original Assignee
青岛海尔空调器有限总公司
海尔智家股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 青岛海尔空调器有限总公司, 海尔智家股份有限公司 filed Critical 青岛海尔空调器有限总公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/089684 priority Critical patent/WO2021212564A1/zh
Publication of WO2021212564A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021212564A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F24HEATING; RANGES; VENTILATING
    • F24FAIR-CONDITIONING; AIR-HUMIDIFICATION; VENTILATION; USE OF AIR CURRENTS FOR SCREENING
    • F24F1/00Room units for air-conditioning, e.g. separate or self-contained units or units receiving primary air from a central station
    • F24F1/0007Indoor units, e.g. fan coil units
    • F24F1/0071Indoor units, e.g. fan coil units with means for purifying supplied air
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F24HEATING; RANGES; VENTILATING
    • F24FAIR-CONDITIONING; AIR-HUMIDIFICATION; VENTILATION; USE OF AIR CURRENTS FOR SCREENING
    • F24F1/00Room units for air-conditioning, e.g. separate or self-contained units or units receiving primary air from a central station
    • F24F1/0007Indoor units, e.g. fan coil units
    • F24F1/0087Indoor units, e.g. fan coil units with humidification means

Definitions

  • the invention belongs to the technical field of air purification, and specifically relates to an air purification device, an air conditioner internal unit, an air conditioner and a fresh air system.
  • Air purifier refers to a product that can absorb, decompose or transform various air pollutants, and can effectively improve air cleanliness.
  • the air purifiers used in the home use dry multilayer filtration and adsorption methods (such as electrostatic adsorption, activated carbon adsorption, HEPA filtration, etc.) to purify the air.
  • dry multilayer filtration and adsorption methods such as electrostatic adsorption, activated carbon adsorption, HEPA filtration, etc.
  • pollutants will directly accumulate on the filter screen of the filter device. If it accumulates for a long time, the pores on the filter screen will be blocked, which will affect the air filtration effect, and the dust accumulated on the filter screen will become the multiplication body of bacteria. And the formation of secondary pollution. Therefore, water-washed air purification products came into being.
  • the present invention provides an air purification device, an internal air conditioner, an air conditioner, and a fresh air system, including: a water tank with an air inlet and an air outlet; a fan for driving the outside of the water tank Air enters the water tank from the air inlet of the water tank; a water washing component is arranged in the water tank and is used for washing the air flowing from the air inlet of the water tank to the air outlet by using the water in the water tank.
  • the air purification device, the internal air conditioner, the air conditioner and the fresh air system of the present invention are equipped with a water washing component, and the dust-containing gas enters the water tank from the air inlet, and exits the water tank after being purified by the water washing component.
  • the tuyere flows out, and the cycle gradually purifies the outside air, which is beneficial to humidify the outside air and is more beneficial to improve the purification effect of the device.
  • Figure 1 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of an air purification device
  • Figure 2 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a washing part
  • Figure 3 shows an enlarged view of Figure 2 at A
  • Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of a water washing assembly used to form a water curtain
  • Figure 5 shows a cross-sectional view of a cylinder and a power part
  • Figure 6 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a water tank and a first water retaining structure
  • Figure 7 shows a transverse perspective cross-sectional view of a first water retaining structure
  • Figure 8 shows a cross-sectional perspective view of another first water retaining structure
  • Figure 9 shows a three-dimensional cross-sectional view of a water tank and a first water retaining structure
  • Figure 10 shows an enlarged view of Figure 9 at B
  • Figure 11 shows a partial longitudinal perspective cross-sectional view of another first water-retaining structure, a water tank, and an air outlet hood;
  • Figure 12 shows an enlarged view of Figure 11 at C
  • Figure 13 shows a partial longitudinal perspective cross-sectional view of yet another first water-retaining structure and water tank cooperation
  • Figure 14 shows an enlarged view of Figure 13 at D
  • Figure 15 shows an enlarged view of Figure 13 at E;
  • Figure 16 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a substrate
  • Figure 17 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a primary filter assembly
  • Figure 18 shows a top view of a water tank and a bottom plate
  • Figure 19 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a base and a water tank
  • Figure 20 shows a horizontal perspective cross-sectional view of a water tank and a water shortage prompt component inside
  • Figure 21 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a water shortage prompt component
  • Figure 22 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of the cooperation of an overflow treatment structure, a water tank, and a base body;
  • Figure 23 shows a partial perspective view of the base corresponding to the overflow treatment structure
  • Figure 24 shows a schematic diagram of a mounting box
  • Figure 25 shows a top view of an air purification device
  • Figure 26 shows a partial perspective cross-sectional view of Figure 25 at M-M;
  • Figure 27 shows a schematic diagram of the connection position of part of the water tank and the lower cover
  • Figure 28 shows a transverse cross-sectional view of Figure 1 at the middle position of the first air outlet
  • Figure 29 shows a partial cross-sectional view of Figure 25 at N-N;
  • Figure 30 shows a perspective view of part of the upper cover
  • Figure 31 shows an enlarged view of Figure 26 at F
  • Figure 32 is a three-dimensional schematic diagram of another air purification device
  • Figure 33 shows a partial cross-sectional view of a power part of an air purification device
  • Figure 34 shows an exploded view of an air purification device
  • Figure 35 shows a longitudinal perspective sectional view of Figure 32
  • Figure 36 shows an enlarged view of Figure 35 at I;
  • Figure 37 shows a partial transverse perspective cross-sectional view of the second base shell
  • Figure 38 shows a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the second base shell at the fixed ring portion
  • Figure 39 shows a partial transverse perspective cross-sectional view of a carrying section and a primary filter assembly thereon
  • Fig. 40 shows an enlarged view of Fig. 39 at G
  • Figure 41 shows a partial perspective view of a carrying section and a primary filter assembly
  • Figure 42 shows an enlarged view of Figure 41 at H
  • Figure 43 shows a top view of a substrate
  • Figure 44 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of yet another air purification device
  • Figure 45 shows a schematic diagram of another water washing part
  • Fig. 46 shows a partial exploded schematic diagram of Fig. 44
  • Fig. 47 shows a longitudinal perspective view of Fig. 44;
  • Figure 48 shows a transverse cross-sectional view of the middle position of the air outlet hood of Figure 44;
  • Figure 49 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of an air outlet hood and a base.
  • Fig. 1 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of an air purification device.
  • the air purification device of the present invention may include an air inlet 3, a water washing part 1 and an air outlet 4 according to the flow direction of the wind.
  • the water washing part 1 includes a water tank 11 and a water washing component arranged in the water tank 11.
  • the water washing component forms a water curtain of the water in the water tank 11 under the power provided by the power part 2, and the dust-containing gas enters the water washing part 1 from the air inlet 3 , Can pass through the water curtain formed by the washing component, so that dust, bacteria and viruses in the dust-containing gas are dissolved in water or removed by the water molecules and negative ions in the water curtain, so as to complete the washing and purification of the dust-containing gas.
  • the clean gas after washing and purification comes from the air outlet 4 to improve the surrounding air quality.
  • the air purification device is also provided with a base body 5 for carrying the water tank 11, and the air inlet 3 and the power part 2 can be arranged on the base body 5 to realize a modular and integrated arrangement.
  • the air inlet portion 3 and the base 5 can be formed as an integral piece by molding.
  • the side wall or bottom wall of the integral piece is used as the air inlet portion 3, and the bottom wall of the integral piece is used to install the power portion. 2 and used to support the water tank 11.
  • the water tank 11 has an air inlet communicating with the air inlet 3 and an air outlet communicating with the air outlet 4.
  • the air outlet 4 may include an air outlet hood 41, and the air outlet hood 41 may be arranged at the air outlet of the water tank 11, and the purified gas enters the air outlet hood 41 from the air outlet of the water tank 11 to pass through the air outlet.
  • the cover 41 can guide the purified gas in any desired direction.
  • FIG. 1 shows that the purified air discharged from the air outlet of the water tank 11 through the air outlet hood 41 is guided to the left, right, and rear in FIG. 1.
  • Fig. 2 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a washing part; as shown in Fig. 2, the water tank 11 can be made of a transparent material, for example, a transparent plastic made by molding.
  • the water tank 11 can contain a washing liquid for cleaning the air.
  • the washing liquid may be clean water, but is not limited to clean water. For example, it may also be water mixed with a disinfectant.
  • the following description takes water as an example, but this should not be regarded as a specific limitation on the scope of protection.
  • the upper part of the water tank 11 is used for gas flow, and the lower part of the water tank 11 is used for holding water.
  • the air inlet 111 of the water tank 11 may be provided on the upper side wall of the water tank 11.
  • a primary filter assembly may be provided on the outer side of the air inlet 111 as described below, and a first block may be provided on the inner side of the air inlet as described below.
  • a water structure, and a humidification filter assembly can optionally be provided on the inner side of the first water retaining structure.
  • the top of the water tank 11 may be provided with an opening as an air outlet, and the gas entering the inside of the water tank 11 may flow out from the top opening of the water tank 11.
  • a second water blocking structure 15 may be provided at the air outlet as described below.
  • the positions of the air inlet 111 and the air outlet may also be set to be different from those shown in FIG. 2.
  • the positions of the air inlet 111 and the air outlet may be reversed, or in some examples, both the air inlet 111 and the air outlet may be arranged on opposite side walls of the water tank 11.
  • the air inlet 111 is arranged on the side wall of the water tank as an example to describe the air purification device of the present solution.
  • those skilled in the art can refer to the following and will not repeat them here.
  • the number of air inlets 111 can be multiple, but only one can be provided, and the shape and size of each air inlet 111 can be set according to actual needs. As shown in FIG. 2, when there are multiple air inlets 111, the air inlets 111 can be evenly distributed along the circumferential direction of the side wall of the water tank 11 so as to evenly divide the gas, so that the gas entering the water tank 11 is evenly distributed.
  • the upper end surface of the air inlet should be lower than the plane of the water curtain formed by the washing component, so as The dust-laden air entering the water tank 11 from the air outlet can flow out of the air outlet of the water tank 11 only after being cleaned by the water curtain.
  • the plane where the water curtain is located is a general term. In principle, the upper end of the air inlet should be located below the intersection of the water curtain and the side wall.
  • the lower part of the water tank 11 is used to contain water, so the lower side wall of the water tank can be provided with scale lines so that the user can observe and control the liquid level of the water tank 11.
  • the water tank 11 can also be made of transparent material only in the part where the scale lines are provided, and the rest is made of non-transparent material, so that the user can observe the water level in the water tank 11 through the scale lines of the transparent part.
  • the scale line can include the lowest level line, which can be shown by "0"; it can also include the highest level line, which can be shown by "max”. Understandably, the scale line marked "max" is located below the air inlet.
  • the water tank 11 may be provided with a water shortage prompt component 18 or a full water prompt component as described below, so as to monitor and warn the water level in the water tank 11; the water tank 11 may also be provided with the following mentioned
  • the water adding structure is used to add water to the water tank without removing the water tank 11; the water tank 11 can also be provided with an overflow treatment structure as mentioned below to discharge the excess water when too much water is added.
  • the structure of the washing component includes but not limited to the following possible implementation methods:
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a washing assembly used to form a water curtain.
  • the washing assembly can lift up the water stored in the water tank 11, and The water is sprayed toward the inner wall of the water tank 11.
  • the water washing assembly may include a cylindrical body 12 arranged in a hollow shape, and the lower end of the cylindrical body 12 and the lower end of the water tank 11 are in communication.
  • the lower end of the barrel 12 is provided with an opening.
  • the power unit 2 can make the cylinder 12 rotate around its own axis, so that the water entering the cylinder 12 gradually moves upward along the inner wall of the cylinder 12 under the action of the rotating force.
  • the side wall near the top end of the cylinder 12 is provided with a plurality of water-swing holes 121 along the circumferential direction.
  • These water-swing holes 121 are higher than the highest liquid level of the washing liquid contained in the water tank 11, so that the water raised from the inner wall of the cylinder 12 is removed from
  • the water sling hole 121 is thrown out, and moves away from the cylinder body 12 at a certain initial speed (the initial velocity is the linear velocity at the position of the water sling hole 121) and gradually moves closer to the inner wall of the water tank 11, thereby forming a water curtain to facilitate Clean the gas entering from the air inlet.
  • the multiple water jetting holes 121 can be evenly or non-uniformly arranged in a circle along the circumference of the cylinder 12, and in some examples, multiple water jetting holes can also be arranged along the axis of the cylinder 12. Hole 121 to improve the effect of washing and purifying.
  • the water washing assembly includes a water pipe, the water pipe may include a first end and a second end, and the first end of the water pipe can extend into the water stored in the water tank to suck water from the lower end of the water tank; the second of the water pipe The end can extend to the upper end of the water tank.
  • a water pump can be provided on the water pipe, and the water pump can make the water in the water tank flow from the first end to the second end.
  • the water washing assembly also includes a rotatable disc-shaped member. After the water flowing from the second end of the water pipe falls on the rotating disc-shaped member, it can be thrown out under the action of centrifugal force to form a water curtain.
  • a hollow rotating body can also be used to replace the rotatable disk-shaped component.
  • the upper end of the rotating body can be opened and a number of through holes are provided on the side wall of the rotating body.
  • the water flowing out from the second end of the water pipe can enter the interior of the rotating body through the upper end opening of the rotating body, and be thrown out from the through hole along the tangential direction of the rotating body, thereby forming a water curtain.
  • a rotating water curtain a water pipe with multiple water outlets arranged along the length direction, two opposite nozzle structures, atomizers, etc., can also be used to form a water curtain and water in the water tank. Curtains, water mist, etc., so that the air entering the water tank can be washed and purified.
  • washing components for making the water in the water tank 11 form a water curtain.
  • the structure of other water washing components can be obtained with reference to this application, and will not be repeated here.
  • the side wall of the cylinder 12 can be gradually inclined from top to bottom toward the direction away from the axis of the cylinder 12.
  • the large diameter end of the cone is located at the top to facilitate the water to climb up along the inner wall of the cylinder 12.
  • the cylinder body 12 can be divided into an upper section 122 and a lower section 123 connected to the lower end of the upper section 122, and the water sling hole 121 may be provided in the upper section 122.
  • the upper and lower sections can be made into one piece by an integral molding method such as injection molding to facilitate the stability of the structure of the cylinder 12.
  • the upper and lower sections of the cylinder 12 can also be separate parts, and the two can be assembled together by screwing, screwing or welding, and the lower end of the upper section 122 and the upper end of the lower section 123 can be sleeved together.
  • the upper end of the lower section 123 can extend into the lower end of the upper section 122, so as to enhance the sealing between the upper section 122 and the lower section 123.
  • the connection between the upper section 122 and the lower section 123 can be connected by a step.
  • a temporary storage area can be provided for the water to climb on the inner wall of the cylinder 12, which is beneficial to increase the amount of water thrown from the water throwing hole 121.
  • FIG. 5 shows a cross-sectional view of a cylinder and a power part in order to reflect the connection between the upper section 122 and the lower section 123.
  • the upper section 122 may include an upper cylinder and an inner flange, and the inner flange may include a radial Segments and axial segments.
  • the radial segment can abut the upper end surface of the outer flange mentioned below, and the axial segment can be bent downward relative to the radial segment.
  • the lower section 123 can be embedded in the flange.
  • the lower section 123 may include a lower cylinder and an outer flange, the outer flange may be sleeved outside the upper end of the lower cylinder, and one end of the outer flange may be higher than the upper end of the lower cylinder.
  • the axial section of the inner flange abuts against the top end of the lower cylinder, and the radial section of the inner flange abuts against the outer flange, so that the side of the axial section away from the radial section can be on the same curved surface as the lower cylinder superior. This provides a gentle climbing surface for the droplets.
  • outer flange and the inner flange cooperate with each other and block the gap with each other, which can facilitate the improvement of the sealing performance between the upper section 122 and the lower section 123.
  • a sealing member may also be provided between the lower section 123 and the upper section 122.
  • Seals include, but are not limited to, sealing rings, gaskets, etc.
  • the included angle between the side wall of the lower section 123 and the axis of the cylinder 12 may be greater than the included angle between the side wall of the upper section 122 and the side wall of the cylinder 12.
  • the water rises rapidly in the lower section 123, and the water in the upper section 122 can easily break away from the supporting force or adhesion force of the inner wall of the upper section 122 to it, and it is more convenient to be thrown out from the water sling hole 121.
  • the change of the inclination angle of the upper section 122 can also be considered from the opening size of the air inlet.
  • the direction of the initial velocity of the water thrown from the water throwing hole 121 leaving the upper section 122 can be related to the section of the upper section 122, and the direction of the initial velocity affects the trajectory of the water being thrown out, thereby affecting the
  • the contact area of the spun water and gas is determined by reasonably setting one or more of the position of the spun hole 121 on the cylinder 12, the rotation speed of the cylinder 12, and the cross section of the cylinder 12 at the position where the spun hole 121 is located. , Can improve the quality of the water curtain formed by the washing component, thereby improving the air purification effect.
  • the upper end of the cylinder body 12 may be provided with an opening, and an upper cover 13 may be provided on the upper end of the cylinder body 12, and the upper cover 13 may be used to close the upper end opening of the cylinder body 12.
  • the water in the barrel 12 rises to the upper end surface of the barrel 12 with the rotation of the barrel 12, the water can be blocked by the upper end surface and fall, so that at least part of the water blocked by the upper end surface flows out from the water sling hole 121. In order to increase the water output of the water sling hole 121.
  • the upper cover 13 may include a bottom wall and a side wall, the bottom wall of the upper cover 13 may abut the upper end surface of the cylinder 12, and the side wall of the upper cover 13 may be sleeved on the outside of the cylinder 12.
  • the lower end surface of the side wall of the upper cover 13 is located above the water sling hole 121 so as to block at least part of the water that has a tendency to move upward. It is understandable that the initial velocity of at least part of the water thrown out from the water sling hole 121 has a tendency to move upwards. The movement trajectory of this part of the water may be above the moving range of the gas, and this part of the water may not interact with the gas.
  • the ability to intercept the water thrown from the water sling hole 121 and moving to the top of the water tank 11 can be improved.
  • the intercepted water can fall on the outer side wall of the upper section 122 below the side wall of the upper cover 13, and can be thrown out toward the inner side wall of the water tank 11 under the action of centrifugal force as the upper section 122 rotates to form Water curtain, which can improve the air purification effect.
  • the cylinder body 12 and the upper cover 13 may be integrally formed by injection molding or the like as an integral piece.
  • an upper water-retaining protrusion may be provided above the water-spinning hole 121, and the upper water-retaining protrusion extends from the barrel
  • the outer side wall of the body 12 extends in a direction away from the cylinder body 12 so as to block at least part of the water that has a tendency to move toward the top of the water tank 11.
  • the upper end of the cylinder 12 is provided with an opening.
  • the water sling hole 121 of the cylinder 12 is served by the opening at the top end thereof, and the water sling hole 121 may or may not be provided on the side wall thereof.
  • a lower water-retaining protrusion 14 may be further provided under the water-swing hole 121, and the lower water-retaining protrusion 14 faces from the outer side wall of the barrel 12 in a direction away from the barrel 12 It extends so as to block the water sprayed from the water sling hole 121 moving toward the bottom of the water tank 11. Understandably, the initial velocity of at least part of the water thrown out from the water sling hole 121 has a tendency to move towards the bottom of the water tank 11. On the one hand, the trajectory of this part of the water may be in the air entering the water tank 11 from the air inlet. Outside the range of motion, this part of the water may not come into contact with the gas.
  • a second water blocking structure 15 for blocking the air outlet of the water tank 11 is provided at the air outlet of the water tank 11.
  • the second water blocking structure 15 can block the water thrown from the water sling hole 121 The water is prevented from splashing to the outside of the water tank 11 from the air outlet of the water tank 11.
  • the water blocked by the second water retaining structure 15 may include water directly thrown out by the water sling hole 121, or may include water carried by the gas passing through the water curtain.
  • FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of FIG. 2 at A.
  • the second water blocking structure 15 includes a water absorbing member 151.
  • the water absorbing member 151 can be made of materials that can block the passage of water droplets but allow gas to pass through. For example, porous polymer materials in the prior art.
  • the water absorbing member 151 needs to use a unidirectional water blocking material, such as , Can be reticulated polyurethane foam, sponge, etc.
  • the second water retaining structure 15 may also include a support frame, which can be arranged in a hollow column shape, and the water absorbing member 151 can be installed Inside the support frame.
  • the support frame can be installed on the top of the water tank 11 by screw connection, snap connection and other suitable methods.
  • a placement groove 112 may be provided at the top of the water tank 11, and the support frame may be embedded in the placement groove 112.
  • the bottom wall of the placement groove 112 may be used to support the bottom wall of the support frame, and the sidewall of the support frame may be interference fit with the sidewall of the placement groove 112 to limit the displacement of the support frame from the circumferential direction.
  • the support frame can also be arranged in a net-like structure, and the support frame of the net-like structure can be installed at the top of the water tank 11 in the same manner as the above-mentioned hollow columnar support frame.
  • the support frame By arranging the support frame into a mesh structure, not only the supporting force of the support frame to the water absorbing member 151 can be improved, but also the passage of the purified gas will not be affected.
  • the mesh of the mesh structure may be hexagonal in order to improve the stability of the support frame.
  • the support frame may include a first support net 152 and a second support net 153
  • the first support net 152 may include a bottom wall and a side wall
  • the side wall of the first support net 152 may be connected to the first support net 152
  • the outer circumference of the bottom wall extends upward.
  • the second supporting net 153 may include a top wall and a side wall, and the side wall of the second supporting net 153 may be connected to the outer circumference of the top wall of the second supporting net 153 and extend downward.
  • the side wall of the first supporting net 152 may be sleeved on the outer side of the side wall of the second supporting net 153.
  • the water absorbing member 151 may be located in the receiving space enclosed by the bottom wall of the first supporting net 152, the side wall of the second supporting net 153, and the top wall of the second supporting net 153, so that the first supporting net 152 is under the water absorbing member 151.
  • Support, the upper end of the water absorbing member 151 is covered by the second supporting net 153 so as to define the upper side of the water absorbing member 151, and the circumferential direction of the water absorbing member 151 is defined by the side walls of the second supporting net 153 and the side walls of the first supporting net 152 in order to maintain
  • the structure and shape of the water absorbing member 151 facilitate the installation of the water absorbing member 151.
  • first support net 152 and/or the second support net 153 may have certain elasticity, so as to improve the sealing performance between the side walls of the first support net 152 and the second support net 153, so as to block water from The side walls of the first support net 152 and the side walls of the second support net 153 splash out of the water tank 11.
  • the sealing performance can also be improved by providing a seal between the two, or can also be achieved by the interference fit of the second supporting net 153 and the first supporting net 152.
  • the outer periphery of the top wall of the second supporting net 153 may be provided with a mounting groove, and the upper end of the side wall of the first supporting net 152 may A mounting protrusion is connected, and the mounting protrusion can be matched and connected to the mounting groove.
  • the mounting protrusion may face the axial direction of the first support net 152, and the lower end surface of the mounting protrusion may abut against the bottom wall of the mounting groove for installation, so as to block the movement of the upper end of the second support net 153.
  • the number of installation grooves may be one or more, and a plurality of installation grooves may be evenly distributed on the outer circumference of the second supporting net 153.
  • FIG. 6 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a water tank 11 and a first water-retaining structure 16.
  • a first water-retaining structure 16 may also be provided at the air inlet of the water tank 11 to prevent water from splashing from the air inlet. Out to the outside of the water tank 11.
  • the first water blocking structure 16 may be located in the water tank 11 and can block the air inlet.
  • the first water blocking structure 16 may be connected to the inner wall of the water tank 11 and located between the cylinder body 12 and the inner wall of the water tank 11. It should be understood that the first water blocking structure 16 provided at the air inlet cannot prevent the air outside the water tank 11 from normally entering the water tank 11 from the air inlet.
  • FIG. 7 is a horizontal partial perspective cross-sectional view of a first water-retaining structure 16
  • FIG. 8 is a horizontal three-dimensional cross-sectional view of another first water-retaining structure 16, as shown in FIGS. 6-8.
  • the first water-retaining structure 16 may include at least two water-retaining blades 161, and there is a distance between two adjacent water-retaining blades 161.
  • the water-retaining blades 161 face the water tank.
  • One end of the axial direction of the water blocking blade 161 and the end of the water blocking blade 161 away from the axial direction of the water tank 11 are located in different radial directions of the cross section.
  • the axial direction of the water tank 11 may be used as the height direction of the water blocking blade 161, and the circumferential direction of the water tank 11 may be used as the width direction of the water blocking blade 161.
  • the cross section of the water tank 11 is a cross section obtained by intercepting the water blocking blade 161 with a plane parallel to the upper end surface of the water tank 11, and the length direction of the cross section is the length direction of the water blocking blade 161.
  • the cross section of at least part of the water blocking blades 161 can be inclined toward one side, so that the water blocking blades 161 are far away from the cylinder 12 when viewed from the outside of the water tank 11 toward the inside of the water tank 11.
  • One end of the water-retaining blade 161 can block the end of the water-retaining blade 161 close to the cylinder 12, so as to increase the probability of water droplets hitting the side wall of the water-retaining blade 161, so as to intercept the scattered water droplets and prevent the water droplets from flying out from the air inlet.
  • two adjacent water blocking blades 161 may be inclined toward the same direction (in FIGS. 6-8, the same inclination direction of the two water blocking blades 161 is shown as an example), or may be inclined toward different directions. It should be pointed out that the inclination direction of the water blocking blade 161 refers to the position direction of the end of the water blocking blade 161 away from the axis of the water tank 11 relative to the end of the water blocking blade 161 close to the axis of the water tank 11.
  • the distance between the two water-retaining blades 161 is relatively large to facilitate air circulation, and the structure is relatively simple, which is beneficial to design and processing; when the two water-retaining blades 161 are inclined When the directions are different, the distance between the two water blocking blades 161 is relatively small, which is beneficial to blocking the passage of water droplets, and can improve the water blocking effect.
  • the first water-retaining structure 16 is provided with at least two water-retaining blades 161, and there is a distance between two adjacent water-retaining blades 161, and at least part of the water-retaining blades 161 extends from the axis of the water tank 11 to the water tank.
  • the edge of 11 is gradually inclined to one side, so that the air coming in from the air inlet of the water tank 11 enters the water tank 11 through the gap between the two water blocking blades 161, and then passes through the water curtain formed by the water curtain assembly, thereby obtaining Purification.
  • the water blocking blades 161 inclined to one side can block water droplets from passing through the gap between two adjacent water blocking blades 161, thereby preventing water droplets from splashing to the outside of the water tank 11, which is beneficial to avoid affecting other components. It is also beneficial to reduce the waste of water in the water tank 11.
  • the inclination direction of the water blocking blade 161 may be opposite to the rotation direction of the cylinder 12 to improve the water blocking effect of the water blocking blade 161.
  • the inclination direction of the water blocking blade 161 may be clockwise.
  • the distance between two adjacent water blocking blades 161 at an end close to the axis of the water tank 11 may be greater than the distance between two adjacent water blocking blades 161 at an end far away from the axis of the water tank 11. That is, the water blocking blade 161 may include a first end and a second end, the first end is close to the axis of the water tank 11, and the second end is far away from the axis of the water tank 11. The distance between the first ends of two adjacent water-blocking blades 161 may be greater than the distance between the second ends of the two water-blocking blades 161, so as to better intercept water droplets and prevent water droplets from splashing to the outside of the water tank 11.
  • the width of one water blocking blade 161 may be equal to or greater than the distance between the first ends of two adjacent water blocking blades 161.
  • the second end of one water blocking blade 161 can block the first end of the next water blocking blade 161, that is, the second end of the water blocking blade 161 located upstream can block the second end of the water blocking blade 161 located downstream.
  • the downstream water-retaining blade 161 here refers to the oblique direction of the water-retaining blade 161 as the indicated direction, and the first water-retaining blade 161 downstream of the current water-retaining blade 161 along the indicated direction is the downstream Water blocking blade 161 (in the direction in which the water blocking blade 161 is inclined, the front is upstream and the rear is downstream).
  • the first water-retaining blade 1611 and the second water-retaining blade 1612, the second water-retaining blade 1612 is the downstream water-retaining blade 161 of the first water-retaining blade 1611, from the outside of the water tank 11 into the water tank 11 It can be seen that the first end of the second water blocking blade 1612 is blocked by the second end of the first water blocking blade 1611.
  • an intercepting piece is connected to the water blocking blade 161, and the intercepting piece extends toward the adjacent water blocking blade 161.
  • the interception piece may include a first interception piece 163 that extends toward the downstream water blocking blade.
  • the end of the water blocking blade 161 close to the axis of the water tank 11 is the first end of the water blocking blade 161
  • the end of the first blocking piece 163 away from the water blocking blade 161 is the second end of the water blocking blade 161.
  • the interception piece may not be provided, and the width of the water blocking blade 161 may be wide enough so that the width of the water blocking blade 161 can cover the first end of the next water blocking blade 161.
  • the structure of the water blocking blade 161 can be simple and easy to process.
  • the first water retaining structure 16 may further include a retaining ring 162, the retaining ring 162 is located between two adjacent water retaining blades 161, and the projection of the water throwing hole 121 is located in the retaining ring 162 , In order to intercept the water droplets thrown from the water throwing hole 121.
  • the retaining ring 162 can also connect a plurality of water retaining blades 161 together, so that the connection between two adjacent water retaining blades 161 can be strengthened, and the stability and structural strength of the first water retaining structure 16 can be improved.
  • the retaining ring 162 is connected to a plurality of water retaining blades 161. It's roughly in the middle.
  • the retaining ring 162 may be arranged at an upper middle position of the water retaining blade 161 so as to reduce the obstacle of the retaining ring 162 to the water tank 11 from entering the air.
  • the above-mentioned retaining ring 162 may be replaced by a second blocking piece 166 arranged between two adjacent water blocking blades 161.
  • the second blocking piece 166 extends from the water blocking blade 161 located downstream toward the water blocking blade 161 located upstream.
  • the second blocking piece 166 and the first blocking piece 163 of different water blocking blades 161 are arranged separately, and the projections on the air inlet have overlapping parts. That is, the end of the second blocking piece 166 on the downstream water blocking blade 161 away from the water blocking blade 161 can be blocked, and the end of the first blocking piece 163 on the upstream water blocking blade 161 away from the water blocking blade 161 can be blocked.
  • the second interception piece 166 and the first interception piece 163 between the upstream water blocking blade 161 and the downstream water blocking blade 161 have an overlapped portion, which is convenient for intercepting the water droplets splashing toward the air inlet.
  • the two sides of the thickness direction of one water blocking blade 161 may be connected with the second blocking piece 166 and the first blocking piece 163 respectively.
  • the water blocking blade 161 is connected with at least two second blocking pieces 166; at least one first blocking piece 163 connected to the upstream water blocking blade 161 is located at two second blocking pieces connected to the downstream water blocking blade 161 Between 166.
  • the water blocking blade 166 is connected with at least two first blocking pieces 163; at least one second blocking piece 166 connected to the downstream water blocking blade is located between the two first blocking pieces 163 connected to the upstream water blocking blade 161 .
  • the distance that the gas travels between two adjacent water blocking blades 161 can be increased, thereby increasing the contact area between the gas and the dropped droplets.
  • the upstream and downstream intercepting sheets block each other, which can effectively block the dropped droplets.
  • FIG. 8 shows that one water blocking blade 161 has two first intercepting blades 163 and two first intercepting pieces 163 as an example.
  • the second end of the water blocking blade 161 may be connected with a first intercepting piece 163 so as to block the first end of the downstream water blocking blade 161; the first end of the water blocking blade 161 may be connected with a second intercepting piece 166 to facilitate The distance that the gas travels between the two adjacent water blocking blades 161 is increased, thereby increasing the contact area between the gas and the dropped droplets.
  • the second interception piece 166 can also block each other with the first interception piece 163 of the downstream water blocking blade 161, thereby blocking the dropped droplets.
  • the middle of the water blocking blade may also be connected with the second blocking piece 166 and the first blocking piece 163, and the first blocking piece 163 located in the middle of the water blocking blade 161 is closer to the first blocking piece 161 than the second blocking piece 166. Two-terminal setting.
  • a plurality of second blocking pieces 166 connected to the first end of the water blocking blade 161 may be located on the same circumference, so as to correspond to the trajectory of the water thrown from the water sling hole 121 to improve the water blocking effect.
  • the two ends of the water blocking blade 161 may extend beyond the two ends of the air inlet, that is, the upper end of the water blocking blade 161 extends from the upper end surface of the air inlet Extend partly upward, the lower end of the water blocking blade 161 extends partly from the lower end surface of the air inlet, in other words, in the axial direction of the water tank 11, the length between the two ends of the water blocking blade 161 may be greater than that of the air inlet The length between the two ends.
  • the water droplets intercepted by the water blocking blade 161 or the retaining ring 162 or the second blocking piece 166 or the first blocking piece 163 will follow the surface of the water blocking blade 161 or the retaining ring 162 or the first blocking piece 163 or the first blocking piece 163.
  • the second blocking piece 166 flows down to the bottom of the water tank 11. It should be understood that the bottom of the water blocking blade 161 needs to be lower than the air inlet of the water tank 11 to prevent water from flowing to the outside of the water tank 11; moreover, the water blocking blade 161 will partially block the air inlet of the water tank 11 to intercept the air inlet to the water tank 11. There needs to be a gap between the two adjacent water blocking blades 161 or between the water blocking blade 161 and the inner wall of the air inlet.
  • the portion of the lower end of the water blocking blade 161 that extends beyond the air inlet may have an inclined surface 1613, which is arranged obliquely downward from the edge of the water tank 11 toward the axis of the water tank 11, so that the air entering from the air inlet of the water tank 11 is Under the guidance of the inclined surface 1613, it moves to the bottom of the water tank 11, so that it can first contact the water at the bottom of the water tank 11, so that corresponding purification can be obtained through this surface contact.
  • the inclined part of the water blocking blade 161 may have a certain arc.
  • the air entering from the air inlet first passes through the distance between two adjacent water blocking blades 161 before entering the water tank 11.
  • the gap between two adjacent water blocking blades 161 has a guiding effect on the air, so it is set in an arc to facilitate air flow through and reduce the resistance of the water blocking blades 161 to air.
  • Figure 9 shows a three-dimensional cross-sectional view of a water tank 11 and a first water retaining structure 16
  • Figure 10 shows an enlarged view of Figure 9 at D, as shown in Figures 6, 9 and 10
  • the first water retaining structure 16 may further include a mounting cover 164, the upper end of the water blocking blade 161 is connected to the mounting cover 164, and the mounting cover 164 is detachably connected to the inner side wall of the water tank 11.
  • the top ends of all the water-retaining blades 161 can be connected together by providing the mounting cover 164, so as to increase the overall structural strength of the first water-retaining structure 16.
  • the cover 164 to assemble the plurality of water blocking blades 161 into one body, the assembly of the first water blocking structure 16 can be facilitated.
  • connection methods of the installation cover 164 and the inner side wall of the water tank 11 but it is not limited to the following implementation methods:
  • the inner wall of the water tank 11 is provided with a limiting groove 113, the circumferential direction of the limiting groove 113 spans a part of the air inlet, the mounting cover 164 is connected to the limiting flange 1642, The positioning flange 1642 is matedly connected to the limiting groove 113.
  • the limiting groove 113 includes a bottom wall and two side walls, the limiting flange 1642 can be inserted into the limiting groove 113 from top to bottom, and one side of the limiting flange 1642 is close to the limiting groove 113 One side wall of the washing part 1 abuts.
  • the edge of the mounting cover 164 on the side away from the washing part 1 can abut against the inner wall of the water tank 11 (the other side wall of the limiting groove 113). Based on the above, the displacement of the mounting cover 164 in the transverse direction of the water tank 11 can be restricted.
  • the side wall of the water tank 11 may include an arc-shaped part and a vertical part, and the air inlet may be opened on the arc-shaped part of the water tank 11.
  • the water sling hole 121 provided thereon also follows the barrel 12 to move in the circumferential direction.
  • the limiting groove 113 can be provided on the arc-shaped part, and the limiting flange 1642 is correspondingly set in a matching arc shape. In this way, the mounting cover 164 can be restricted from moving in the circumferential direction. .
  • the water tank 11 and the mounting cover 164 can also be fixed by fasteners, where the fasteners include but are not limited to bolts, screws, fixing pins and the like.
  • the upper end surface of the mounting cover 164 can also be provided with a diversion groove 1641, which communicates with the inside of the water tank 11, so that the water falling on the top of the mounting cover 164 can flow back again under the action of the diversion groove 1641 The bottom of the water tank 11.
  • Fig. 3 shows an enlarged view of Fig. 2 at A.
  • the inner wall of the water tank 11 may also be provided with a guide groove 117, which may be along the vertical direction of the water tank 11. Extend, so that when the thrown water falls into the gap between the installation cover 164 and the inner wall of the water tank 11, the water can flow to the bottom of the water tank 11 along the guide groove 117.
  • the first water retaining structure 16 further includes a reinforced flange 165, and the lower end of the water retaining blade 161 is connected to the reinforced flange 165, so as to strengthen the connection between the water retaining blades 161 Strength, improve the strength and stability of the water structure.
  • a reinforcing rib 1651 is provided on the reinforcing flange 165, and the reinforcing rib 1651 extends toward the axial direction of the water tank 11.
  • the reinforcing rib 1651 may be provided at the lower end of the reinforcing flange 165 to facilitate the collection of water droplets intercepted by the water blocking blade 161 and the retaining ring 162.
  • the first water-retaining structure 16 may further include a vertical wall 1643, which can extend from the position where the cover 164 is installed toward the bottom of the water tank 11 and can intersect the reinforcing flange 165 to strengthen the first retaining wall. Strength of the water structure 16.
  • One side of the standing wall 1643 can be fixed to its adjacent water blocking blade 161 to improve the structural integrity.
  • FIG. 11 shows another partial longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first water retaining structure 16, the water tank 11, and the air outlet hood (for the convenience of showing the water sling hole 121, the tube in FIG. 11
  • the body 12 is not cut
  • the first water-retaining structure 16 may include a shielding plate 167 and a connecting plate 168.
  • the connecting plate 168 can be bent relative to the shielding plate 167, and the shielding plate 167 can be used to shield the entrance
  • the connecting plate 168 can be connected to the side wall of the water tank 11 and extend toward the axial direction of the water tank 11.
  • the shielding plate 167 can be connected to the end of the connecting plate 168 away from the side wall of the water tank 11, so as to shield the side of the shielding plate 167 and the water tank 11. There is a certain gap between the walls, so that the gas entering from the air inlet can first bypass the lower end of the shielding baffle 167 and then contact the water curtain.
  • connection mode of the connecting plate 168 and the side wall of the water tank 11 can refer to the connection mode between the installation cover 164 and the side wall of the water tank 11 in the previous mode.
  • the lower end of the side of the shielding plate 167 facing away from the connecting plate 168 may be connected with a water blocking protrusion 169.
  • the water blocking protrusion 169 may include a bottom wall and a side wall, and the bottom wall of the water blocking protrusion 169 may be connected to the shielding plate.
  • the lower end of the plate 167 extends toward the axial direction of the water tank 11, and the side wall of the water blocking protrusion 169 can be bent upward relative to the bottom wall of the water blocking protrusion 169.
  • the shielding plate 167, the bottom wall of the water blocking protrusion 169, and the side wall of the water blocking protrusion 169 may be combined to form a receiving cavity 523 for collecting water droplets blocked by the first water blocking structure 16. Specifically, the water droplets hitting the shielding plate 167 can flow into the receiving cavity 523 along the shielding plate 167 and can accumulate in the receiving cavity 523.
  • At least one of the bottom wall and the side wall of the water blocking protrusion 169 may be provided with a plurality of through holes, and the water accumulated in the receiving cavity 523 may pass through the through holes to return to the bottom of the water tank 11.
  • FIG. 13 shows a partial longitudinal cross-sectional view of another first water-retaining structure 16 and the water tank 11 (for the convenience of showing the water sling hole 121, the cylinder 12 in FIG. 13 is not Cutaway), Fig. 14 shows an enlarged view of Fig. 13 at D, and Fig. 15 shows an enlarged view of Fig. 13 at E.
  • the first water-retaining structure 16 may include a humidification filter 171
  • the installation shell can be used to install the humidification filter element 171, and can maintain a certain humidity of the humidification filter element 171.
  • the mounting shell includes an outer shell 172 and an inner shell 173.
  • the humidification filter 171 is located between the outer shell 172 and the inner shell 173.
  • the outer shell 172 and the inner shell 173 can clamp the humidification filter 171 so as to carry out the humidification filter 171.
  • the inner shell 173 may include an upper guide plate and an inner bracket.
  • the upper guide plate can be connected to the side wall of the water tank 11 and can extend toward the axial direction of the water tank 11.
  • the inner bracket can extend from the position of the upper guide plate toward the bottom of the water tank 11, and the inner shell 173 is used to limit the upper end and the inner side of the humidification filter 171.
  • the housing 172 may include a lower support plate and an outer bracket.
  • the lower support plate can be located below the upper guide plate and can be connected to the upper guide plate.
  • the lower support plate may extend toward the axial direction of the water tank 11, and the outer bracket may extend from the position of the support plate to the bottom of the water tank 11, and the housing 172 is used to limit the lower end and the outer side of the humidification filter 171.
  • the inner bracket and the outer bracket can be arranged in a frame structure to facilitate the passage of gas.
  • the water jet hole 121 provided on the cylinder 12 may be higher than the upper guide plate, and the upper guide plate is provided with a water inlet hole 111.
  • the water inlet hole 111 may face the humidification filter 171 so as to provide the humidification filter 171 water. Understandably, the water droplets thrown out from the water sling hole 121 can fall on the upper guide plate after contacting part of the side wall above the upper guide plate, and enter the humidification filter 171 through the water inlet hole 111 on the upper guide plate. In order to wet the humidification filter 171.
  • the upper guide plate may gradually incline downward, and the water inlet 111 may be provided at the lower end of the upper guide plate.
  • the humidification filter 171 may include a first radial section and an axial section.
  • the first radial section of the humidification filter 171 is located between the upper guide plate and the lower support plate, and the axial section of the humidification filter 171 is located inside. Between the bracket and the outer bracket. Through the inclined upper guide plate, the water on the upper guide plate can be guided to the axial section of the humidification filter 171, so that the axial section is fully wetted, so as to facilitate the axial section to the air inlet from the side wall of the water tank 11. The incoming dusty air is humidified and filtered.
  • the inner shell 173 further includes an upper pressing plate that can extend from the position of the inner bracket toward the axial direction of the water tank 11; the outer shell 172 further includes a lower cover plate that faces the axial direction of the water tank 11 from the position of the outer bracket Extension; the upper pressure plate and the lower cover plate can limit the lower end of the humidification filter 171, so as to lock the moisture of the humidification filter 171 to prevent its loss.
  • the humidification filter 171 may further include a second radial section, and the second radial section may be located between the upper pressure plate and the lower cover plate.
  • the inner shell 173 may further include an inner water baffle plate.
  • the inner water baffle plate includes a bottom disposed opposite to the upper pressure plate and a side part extending upward from the bottom. Part of the inside.
  • the inner water baffle can abut against the bottom end of the humidification filter 171 so as to block the loss of moisture at the bottom end of the humidification filter 171.
  • the housing 172 may further include an outer water baffle, which includes a bottom disposed opposite to the lower cover and a side extending upward from the bottom.
  • the side of the outer water baffle covers at least part of the inner side of the lower cover .
  • the outer side of the outer water baffle can cover at least part of the outer side of the inner water baffle, so that the inner water baffle and the outer water baffle can block their respective gaps each other, so as to reduce the loss of moisture on the humidification filter 171.
  • a baffle plate may be connected to the lower end of the upper guide plate, and the outer side of the lower support plate is tightly connected with the baffle plate, so as to realize the installation of the inner shell 173.
  • the top surface of the lower support plate has a shape that matches the bottom surface of the upper guide plate, so as to increase the contact area between the two, thereby improving the connection between the two.
  • the humidification filter 171 includes, but is not limited to, absorbent cotton nets and sponges.
  • the connection between the upper guide plate and the upper end side wall of the water tank 11 can refer to the above-mentioned installation method of the first water retaining structure 16 and the side wall of the water tank 11, which will not be repeated here.
  • the position of the water sling hole 121 on the cylinder 12 corresponds to the middle of the air inlet of the water tank 11 (that is, the water sling hole 121).
  • the formed water curtain can meet the gas coming in from the air inlet).
  • the water throwing hole 121 on the corresponding cylinder 12 can be higher than the upper end surface of the air inlet, so that the water curtain is blocked by the side wall of the water tank 11 and falls to wet the humidification below.
  • the filter 171 can also correspond to the air inlet, so as to wet the humidification filter 171 at the corresponding position, so that the gas coming in from the air inlet contacts the humidification filter 171 to be purified.
  • FIG. 5 the structure shown in FIG. 5 is taken as an example to explain the power unit 2 and its cooperation with the cylinder 12. Taking the outer side of the cylindrical body 12 as an example, a case where the power unit 2 drives the cylindrical body 12 to rotate will be described. However, it should be understood that the structure of the barrel 12 is not limited to the structure in FIG. 5, and it may also be other structures mentioned above.
  • the power unit 2 may include a rotating shaft 21, a reducer, and a motor 22.
  • the motor 22 may be electrically connected to an external power source, and the motor 22 has a motor shaft 221.
  • the base 5 may include a base 51, and the reducer may include a first helical gear 23 rotatably disposed on the base 51, a second helical gear 24 rotatably connected to the bottom of the water tank 11, and the first helical gear 23 and the second helical gear 24 mesh with each other , And the second helical gear 24 may be located above the first helical gear 23.
  • the structure of the reducer may include but is not limited to the above-mentioned structure.
  • the disassembly of the water tank 11 and the base 51 can be facilitated, thereby facilitating cleaning and/or adding water to the water tank 11. Specifically, when the water tank 11 and the base 51 need to be separated, only the first helical gear 23 and the second helical gear 24 need to be separated.
  • the motor shaft 221 may be coaxially connected to the first helical gear 23.
  • the rotating shaft 21 includes a first end and a second end.
  • the first end of the rotating shaft 21 can be coaxially connected to the second helical gear 24, and the second end of the rotating shaft 21 can be connected to the cylinder 12.
  • the first end of the rotating shaft 21 may be the lower end of the rotating shaft 21, and the second end of the rotating shaft 21 may be the upper end of the rotating shaft 21.
  • the motor shaft 221 of the motor 22 can drive the first helical gear 23 to rotate, and the first helical gear 23 can drive the second helical gear 24 to rotate, thereby driving the shaft connected to the second helical gear 24
  • the rotation of 21 causes the cylinder 12 connected with the rotating shaft 21 to rotate, and realizes the functions of the cylinder 12 of absorbing, lifting and spraying water from the water tank 11.
  • the motor 22 may include a motor main body 222 and a motor shaft 221, and the motor main body 222 can be suspended and mounted on the base 51 to reduce the influence of the vibration of the motor 22 on the parts below it.
  • a mounting claw 223 extending outward of the motor body 222 may be connected to the side wall of the motor main body 222, and a fastening hole may be provided on the mounting claw 223, and the fastener may pass through the fastening hole and be connected to the base 51.
  • a plurality of mounting claws 223 may be arranged circumferentially on the outer side of the motor main body 222, and these mounting claws 223 may be evenly distributed on the outer periphery of the motor main body 222 to balance the force of the motor 22 seat.
  • Fasteners include but are not limited to bolts, screws, and positioning pins.
  • the base 51 can be thickened at the connection position with the fasteners, so as to improve the bearing capacity of the base 51.
  • a connecting post 511 may be provided on the base 51, an end of the connecting post 511 away from the base 51 may abut against the mounting claw 223, and the fastener may pass through the through hole of the mounting claw 223 and be connected to the connecting post 511.
  • the number of connecting posts 511 may be the same as the number of mounting claws 223.
  • a vibration damping structure may be provided between the upper end of the motor main body 222 and the base 51 to reduce the impact of the vibration generated by the motor 22 on the base 51.
  • the damping structure may include a first damping sleeve, and the first damping sleeve may be located between the upper end of the motor main body 222 and the lower end surface of the base 51.
  • the first damping sleeve may be made of elastic materials such as rubber, so as to be able to attenuate vibration.
  • the first helical gear 23 is rotatably installed above the base 51, and the motor shaft 221 can pass through the base 51 to be connected to the first helical gear 23.
  • the upper end of the motor shaft 221 can be screwed to, so as to realize the installation of the motor shaft 221 and the first helical gear 23.
  • the motor shaft 221 may include a first section and a second section that are connected.
  • the first section of the motor shaft 221 is connected to the motor main body 222, and the second section of the motor shaft 221 is threadedly connected to the first helical gear 23.
  • the section radius of the first section of the motor shaft 221 is larger than the section radius of the second section of the motor shaft 221.
  • the lower end of the first helical gear 23 can abut against the upper end surface of the first section of the motor shaft 221 so as to prevent the first helical gear 23 from moving downward.
  • the rotation direction of the motor shaft 221 can be such that the first helical gear 23 is screwed to the motor shaft 221 so that the motor shaft 221 can drive the first helical gear 23 to rotate.
  • a vibration damping structure may be provided between the first helical gear 23 and the second helical gear 24 to weaken the influence of vibration on the first helical gear 23 on the second helical gear 24.
  • the damping structure may include a second damping sleeve, and the second damping sleeve may be sleeved on the first helical gear 23 so as to increase the contact surface between the second damping sleeve and the first helical gear 23.
  • the second helical gear 24 can be installed at the lower end of the water tank 11.
  • the bottom wall of the water tank 11 can be provided with a mounting recess 114.
  • 114 has an opening facing downward, and the second helical gear 24 is at least partially installed in the mounting recess 114.
  • the installation recess 114 extends toward the inside of the water tank 11 and is located in the cylinder 12.
  • a bottom plate 115 may be installed at the bottom end of the water tank 11, and the bottom plate 115 may be provided with an insertion port 1151 coaxial with the installation recess 114.
  • the bottom plate 115 is detachably connected to the water tank 11, for example, the bottom plate 115 and the water tank 11 are assembled together by screws.
  • the second helical gear 24 may be provided inside the insertion port 1151 to achieve modular installation.
  • a limiting plate 1152 may be provided in the insertion port 1151, and the limiting plate 1152 and the area below it may define an installation space for the second helical gear 24.
  • the second helical gear 24 is rotatably disposed in the installation space, so as to limit the movable area of the second helical gear 24.
  • the insertion port 1151 is located outside the first helical gear 23, so that the movable area of the first helical gear 23 and the second helical gear 24 can be defined by the limiting plate 1152, the insertion port 1151, and the base 51, that is to say ,
  • the upper part of the second helical gear 24 is restricted by the limit plate 1152, and the lower part of the second helical gear 24 is restricted by the first helical gear 23, so the longitudinal movement of the second helical gear 24 will be restricted, thereby avoiding the second helical gear 24
  • the gear 24 and the first helical gear 23 are disengaged to ensure the reliability of transmission.
  • the lower end of the rotating shaft 21 can be threadedly connected to the second helical gear 24.
  • the motor 22 causes the second helical gear 24 to rotate, and the direction of rotation of the second helical gear 24 is such that the second helical gear 24 and the shaft 21 are in a mutually tightened state, that is, the motor 22 drives the second helical gear
  • the movement direction of 24 can be opposite to the direction in which the rotating shaft 21 separates from the second helical gear 24 so that the second helical gear 24 drives the rotating shaft 21 to rotate.
  • Figure 16 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a base 5
  • Figure 18 shows a top view of a water tank and a bottom plate
  • a vibration damping structure may be provided between the bottom plate 115 and the base 51 to reduce vibration
  • the structure may include a third damping pad 63. Part of the vibration generated by the motor 22 is transmitted to the base 51. Since the third damping pad 63 is located between the bottom surface of the water tank 11 and the top surface of the base 51, the third damping pad 63 can be deformed to attenuate the energy caused by the vibration. In turn, it plays a role in damping vibration.
  • the third damping pad 63 includes, but is not limited to, a rubber pad, a spring, an elastic ball, and a spring leaf.
  • the base 51 has a mounting hole, and the lower part of the third shock-absorbing pad 63 can be embedded in the mounting hole.
  • the lower part of the third shock-absorbing pad 63 can be interference fit with the mounting hole, so as to realize the installation of the third shock-absorbing pad 63.
  • the number of the third damping pads 63 is non-limiting, and it may be one or more.
  • the figures and the figures show that four third damping pads 63 are provided.
  • the two third damping pads 63 may be separately arranged on both sides of the first helical gear 23 or the second helical gear 24; when the third damping pad 63 is When there are three, the three third damping pads 63 can be distributed at the three vertices of the triangle to facilitate the installation reliability of the water tank 11; when there are four third damping pads 63, the four third damping pads 63
  • the vibration pads 63 may be respectively located at the four corners of the approximately rectangular base 51.
  • the structure of the third damping pad 63 is not limited to this, and the present embodiment is only described here as an example.
  • a side of the water tank 11 facing the base 51 is provided with a plurality of supporting protrusions 64, and the supporting protrusions 64 are used to bear the pressure of the water tank 11 on the third damping pad 63.
  • the third damping pad 63 and the supporting protrusion 64 may be arranged in a staggered manner.
  • the supporting protrusion 64 may be connected to the bottom wall of the water tank 11, and a third vibration damping pad 63 may be provided under the supporting protrusion 64 to reduce vibration at the contact point between the supporting protrusion 64 and the base 51.
  • the height of the third damping pad 63 in the axial direction of the water tank 11 may be equal to the height of the supporting protrusion 64 in the axial direction of the water tank 11. It should be noted that the third damping pad 63 will be affected by the gravity of the water tank 11. Therefore, after the third damping pad 63 is used for a period of time, the deformation ability of the third damping pad 63 may be weakened. The pressure of the water tank 11 on the third damping pad 63 can be reduced, so that the third damping pad 63 maintains its deformability so as to resist the vibration generated by the base 51.
  • the supporting protrusion 64 may include a cylinder, one end of the cylinder may be connected to the bottom wall of the water tank 11, and the other end of the cylinder may abut on the upper end surface of the base 51.
  • the supporting protrusion 64 may include a prism body, and the longitudinal section of the prism body may be arranged in a trapezoid shape. From the axis of the prism body to the edge of the prism body, the side walls of the prism body are gradually inclined toward the water tank 11, that is, The cross section of the prism near the water tank 11 is larger than the cross section of the prism near the base 51.
  • four supporting protrusions 64 are provided in FIG. 18.
  • the two supporting protrusions 64 may be located on both sides of the first helical gear 23 or the second helical gear 24, and the two supporting protrusions 64 may be arranged symmetrically;
  • the number 64 is three, the three supporting protrusions 64 can be distributed at the three vertices of the triangle to facilitate the installation reliability of the water tank 11;
  • the number of supporting protrusions 64 is four, the four supporting protrusions 64 can be They are respectively located at the four vertices of the rectangle, and in some examples, at least two of the four supporting protrusions 64 may be symmetrically arranged.
  • the structure of the supporting protrusion 64 is not limited to this, and it is just an example for illustration here.
  • the base 51 is provided with positioning protrusions 513, and the side of the water tank 11 facing the base 51 is provided with a first positioning recess 516 that is adapted to the positioning protrusions 513, so as to realize the connection between the water tank 11 and the base 51 Quick installation.
  • the positioning protrusion 513 has a conical shape, and the radius of the cross section of the positioning protrusion 513 gradually increases in a direction away from the water tank 11 so as to save effort when the water tank 11 is removed from the base 51.
  • At least two positioning protrusions 513 are provided on the base 51, and the positioning protrusions 513 are respectively located on both sides of the second helical gear 24.
  • the vibration at the second helical gear 24 is relatively large.
  • the vibration can be transmitted in the vertical direction, and the vibration can also be transmitted in the circumferential direction of the base 51.
  • the vibration is transmitted to the positioning protrusion 513, the height of the transverse section of the positioning protrusion 513 changes Can reduce vibration.
  • a plurality of positioning protrusions 513 are provided to restrict the rotation of the water tank 11.
  • the lower end of the rotating shaft 21 can be connected to the second helical gear 24, and the rotating shaft 21 can pass through the insertion port 1151 and the mounting recess 114 from bottom to top and be connected to the upper end of the cylinder 12, that is to say
  • the rotating shaft 21 can be rotatably installed in the insertion opening 1151 and the installation recess 114, and the installation recess 114 or the insertion opening 1151 can radially limit the rotation shaft 21 to avoid bending damage of the rotation shaft 21.
  • a bearing 25 may be provided in the insertion port 1151, the rotating shaft 21 can be rotatably arranged inside the insertion port 1151 through the bearing 25, and the bearing 25 can support the rotating shaft 21 in a radial direction.
  • the limit plate 1152 can divide the insertion port 1151 into a first area and a second area arranged side by side in the up and down direction, the second helical gear 24 can be located in the first area below the limit plate 1152, and the bearing 25 can be located in the limit plate 1152. In the second area above the bit plate 1152, in order to achieve modular installation.
  • an oil seal 27 and a gasket 26 may be provided in the second area, and the gasket 26 may be located between the bearing 25 and the oil seal 27.
  • the gasket 26 can isolate the oil seal 27 and the bearing 25 and prevent the rolling elements of the bearing 25 from slipping out.
  • the oil seal 27 can seal the rotating shaft 21 to prevent dust, liquid, etc. from entering.
  • the upper end of the mounting recess 114 may also be provided with a bearing 25 to support the rotating shaft 21 in the radial direction.
  • the upper end of the installation recess 114 may also be provided with the gasket 26 and the oil seal 27 mentioned above.
  • bearing 25, the gasket 26, and the oil seal 27 on the mounting recess 114 and the insertion port 1151 can be symmetrically arranged.
  • a connecting member 28 may be provided between the upper end side wall of the rotating shaft 21 and the inner wall of the cylinder 12, so as to connect the rotating shaft 21 and the cylinder 12 together through the connecting member 28.
  • the connecting member 28 may be arranged above the mounting recess 114 (as shown in FIG. 5).
  • the connecting member 28 may include a sleeve 281 and a connecting piece 282.
  • the sleeve 281 may be sleeved on the outside of the first end of the rotating shaft 21, and the connecting piece The two sides of 282 are respectively connected to the outer side of the sleeve 281 and the inner wall of the cylinder 12, so that the connection between the rotating shaft 21 and the cylinder 12 can be realized.
  • the sleeve 281 may be integrally formed with the bottom wall of the water tank 11 through an integral molding method such as injection molding.
  • One or more connecting pieces 282 may be provided.
  • the multiple connecting pieces 282 can be evenly distributed in the circumferential direction of the rotating shaft 21, so as to improve the connection strength between the connecting piece 28 and the cylinder 12, and at the same time, the connecting pieces 282 can also play a role in countering
  • the supporting function of the cylinder 12 is to improve the structural strength of the cylinder 12.
  • the top end of the rotating shaft 21 can be connected with the upper cover 13 to simultaneously drive the upper cover 13 to rotate.
  • the inner wall of the upper cover 13 may be provided with a mounting block, the mounting block extends downward, and the upper end of the rotating shaft 21 may be screwed to the mounting block.
  • reinforcing ribs may be provided between the outer side wall of the mounting block and the upper cover 13, so as to support the mounting block and strengthen the strength of the mounting block.
  • one end of the reinforcing rib is connected to the outer side wall of the mounting block, and the other end of the reinforcing rib extends toward the inner wall of the upper cover 13 and is connected to the inner wall of the upper cover 13.
  • reinforcing ribs may be arranged around the circumference of the mounting block, so as to enhance the circumferential strength of the mounting block.
  • annular protrusion may be connected to the bottom wall of the upper cover 13, and the annular protrusion may extend toward the bottom end of the cylinder 12.
  • the rotating shaft 21 may be a stepped shaft, so as to limit the parts connected with the rotating shaft 21 in the longitudinal direction.
  • the rotating shaft 21 may include a main body section, a primary branch section, a secondary branch section, and a tertiary branch section.
  • the cross-sectional radius of the secondary branch, and the cross-sectional radius of the secondary branch may be greater than the cross-sectional radius of the tertiary branch.
  • both ends of the main body section are respectively connected to the first-level branch section and the second-level branch section, the first-level branch section is connected to the first second-level branch section, and the second-level branch section is connected to the second Secondary branch.
  • the first secondary branch can penetrate through the second helical gear 24, and the bottom end of the first primary branch can abut on the top surface of the second helical gear 24, so as to restrict the second helical gear 24 from moving upward.
  • the first-stage branch section can pass through the oil seal 27, the gasket 26 and the bearing 25 sequentially from bottom to top, and the lower end surface of the main body section can abut against the upper end surface of the bearing 25.
  • the lower oil seal 27, the gasket 26, and the bearing 25 are defined between the limiting plate 1152 and the lower end surface of the main body section.
  • the second-stage branch section can pass through the bearing 25, the gasket 26 and the oil seal 27 in sequence from bottom to top, and the upper end surface of the main body section can abut the lower end surface of the oil seal 27.
  • the upper bearing 25, the gasket 26, and the oil seal 27 are defined between the top wall of the supporting recess and the upper end surface of the main body section.
  • At least part of the sleeve 281 can be sleeved at the connection of the second primary branch section and the second secondary branch section to facilitate the installation of the sleeve 281.
  • the tertiary branch section can pass through the mounting block of the upper cover 13, and the upper end surface of the second secondary branch section can abut the lower end surface of the mounting block.
  • the base 51 may include a bottom wall and a side wall, and the side wall of the base 51 may be connected to at least a part of the outer periphery of the bottom wall of the base 51 and extend upward.
  • at least part of the water tank 11 may be embedded in the base 51, and a gap is formed between the outer wall of the water tank 11 and the side wall of the base 51.
  • a vibration damping pad may be provided between the outer wall of the water tank 11 and the side wall of the base 51.
  • the cross section of the base 51 may include an arc-shaped part and a rectangular part, and the arc-shaped part and the vertical part correspond to and communicate with each other.
  • the shapes of the two ends of the base 51 can be set to be inconsistent, so as to facilitate the user to find the position accurately, thereby facilitating the installation between the water tank 11 and the base 51.
  • one side of the base 51 is provided with an opening, and the opening is provided with a pick-and-place protrusion 514. The two ends of the pick-and-place protrusion 514 are connected to the groove wall of the base 51.
  • the bottom plate 115 and the first helical gear 23 can be located in the accommodating space, and the accommodating space can play a role in limiting the circumferential direction of the bottom plate 115.
  • the bottom plate 115 may be provided with an avoiding recess that matches the shape of the pick-and-place protrusion 514 so that the user can pick up the water tank 11.
  • the base 51 may be provided with a take-out groove 515, the take-out groove 515 can be opened on the side of the take-and-place protrusion 514 away from the accommodating space, and the bottom end of the take-out groove 515 can be lower than the upper end surface of the take-and-place protrusion 514 .
  • At least part of the bottom plate 115 and the water tank 11 are located above the pick-and-place slot, and the bottom plate 115 opposite to the pick-and-place slot may be provided with a hand-holding protrusion 1153, and the hand-holding protrusion 1153 can extend toward the pick-and-place groove.
  • the user when the water tank 11 is to be taken out, the user can put his hand into the take-out slot 515, hold the grip protrusion 1153 upward, and pull it outward to make the first helical gear 23 and the second oblique gear 23
  • the gear 24 is separated to easily realize the separation of the water tank 11 and the base 51.
  • two opposite side walls of the water tank 11 may be provided with hand-holding recesses 116, and the hand-holding recesses 116 may extend toward the inside of the water tank 11.
  • the user can also put his hand into the grip recess 116 and pull the water tank 11 outward.
  • the base body 5 may be provided with a first electrical contact, and the side wall of the water tank 11 is provided with a second electrical contact for electrically connecting with the first electrical contact.
  • the first electrical contact and the second electrical contact may follow the water tank 5 Separate from the substrate and disconnect the electrical contact.
  • a first electrical contact may be provided on the side wall of the base 51, and a second electrical contact may be provided on the side wall of the water tank 11.
  • the base 51 is used to carry the water tank 11, the power unit 2 and the water washing unit 1. Therefore, in order to improve the stability and structural strength of the base 51, so as to carry the weight of the motor 22 and the water tank 11, the following base reinforcement structure can be used.
  • Figure 19 shows a three-dimensional schematic view of a base 51 and a water tank 11.
  • the base reinforcement structure includes auxiliary ribs 5121.
  • the auxiliary ribs 5121 can be connected to the base 51 and extend toward the mounting claw 223.
  • One side of the 5121 can be connected to the above-mentioned connecting column 511 to provide support for the connecting column 511.
  • one or more auxiliary ribs 5121 may be provided, and a plurality of auxiliary ribs 5121 may be uniformly arranged in the circumferential direction of the connecting column 511 so as to support the connecting column 511 evenly in the circumferential direction.
  • the height of the auxiliary rib 5121 may be higher than the height of the connecting column 511, and the upper end of the auxiliary rib 5121 may be provided with a limiting groove, and the limiting groove has an opening on the side facing the connecting column 511.
  • the bottom wall of the limiting groove may abut against the upper end of the mounting claw 223 (or the bottom wall of the limiting groove may be flush with the bottom end of the connecting post 511), so as to limit the mounting claw 223 in the longitudinal direction.
  • the groove wall of the limiting groove can abut against the side wall of the mounting claw 223 so as to limit the outer circumference of the mounting claw 223.
  • the mounting claw 223 may include a first side wall, a second side wall, a third side wall, and a fourth side wall.
  • the first side wall and the second side wall are arranged opposite to each other.
  • the side walls are arranged oppositely, and the first side wall can be connected to the motor main body 222.
  • one connecting column 511 can be connected with three auxiliary ribs 5121, the three auxiliary ribs 5121 can be evenly distributed on the side wall of the connecting column 511, and the upper ends of the three auxiliary ribs 5121 are provided with limit grooves.
  • the second side wall, the third side wall and the fourth side wall can respectively abut against the three groove walls of the three limiting grooves so as to limit the second side wall, the third side wall and the fourth side wall of the mounting claw 223 . It should be noted that this is only a distance description, and the number of auxiliary ribs 5121 is not specifically limited.
  • the base reinforcement structure may further include connecting protrusions 5122, and connecting protrusions 5122 may be provided between the two auxiliary ribs 5121 that are at least partially adjacent and connected to different connecting posts 511, so that several connecting posts 511 are connected as a whole. , Thereby improving the structural strength of the base 51.
  • the connecting protrusion 5122 may be arc-shaped, and the motor 22 may be located in the connecting protrusion 5122.
  • the height of the connecting protrusion 5122 may be smaller than the height of the auxiliary rib 5121, so as to reduce unnecessary structural weight while ensuring the strength of the connecting column 511.
  • the base reinforcement structure may further include support ribs 5123, which can be connected to the base 51 and extend toward the mounting claw 223, and one side of the support ribs 5123 can be connected to the auxiliary Ribs 5121, so as to provide support for the auxiliary ribs 5121 along the thickness direction of the auxiliary ribs 5121.
  • the supporting ribs 5123 can span the height direction of the auxiliary ribs 5121 (that is, the supporting ribs 5123 can be connected to the highest height of the auxiliary ribs 5121), so as to better support the connecting position of the connecting column 511 and the mounting claw 223.
  • the base reinforcement structure may further include radial ribs 5124, and the radial ribs 5124 may be connected to the base 51 and may extend toward the direction of the mounting claw 223.
  • One end of the radial rib 5124 can be connected to the outer side wall of the connecting protrusion 5122 or the auxiliary rib 5121, and the other end of the radial rib 5124 can extend to the edge of the base 51 to improve the overall structural strength of the base 51.
  • the radial rib 5124 may be provided with a wire-passing groove 5125 so that the wire or data line can pass through the wire-passing groove 5125.
  • the base 51 may be provided with a restricting protrusion 5126.
  • the restricting protrusion 5126 may include a vertical section and a horizontal section. The vertical section may extend in the direction of the mounting claw 223. The gap between the bases 51 penetrates so as to restrict the movement of the cable in the longitudinal direction.
  • the base reinforcement structure may further include a circumferential rib 5127, which may be sleeved on the outer side of the connecting protrusion 5122 and/or the auxiliary rib 5121, and has two adjacent diameters.
  • Circumferential ribs 5127 may be provided between the radial ribs 5124 to strengthen the connection between the plurality of radial ribs 5124 and thereby strengthen the structural strength of the base 51.
  • at least one circumferential rib 5127 may be provided between two adjacent radial ribs 5124. Understandably, the more circumferential ribs 5127 between two adjacent radial ribs 5124, the more stable the structure of the radial ribs 5124.
  • a damping protrusion may be provided on the base 51, and the damping protrusion may be arranged in a ring shape and may extend toward the direction of the motor main body 222.
  • the first damping sleeve mentioned above can be sleeved on the upper end of the motor 22 seat, and can be embedded in the damping protrusion, which can limit the position of the damping sleeve. By providing the damping sleeve, the contact area with the motor main body 222 can be increased, thereby improving the damping effect.
  • Figure 20 shows a partial perspective cross-sectional view of a water tank 11 and a water shortage prompt assembly 18 inside
  • Figure 21 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a water shortage prompt assembly 18, as shown in Figures 20 and 21, in order to facilitate comparison
  • the level of the water in the water tank 11 is monitored, and the water tank 11 may be provided with a water shortage prompt component 18 and/or a full water prompt component.
  • the water tank 11 may be provided with only one of the lack of water prompt component 18 or the full water prompt component, or may be provided with the lack of water prompt component 18 or the full water prompt component at the same time.
  • the lack of water prompt assembly 18 when the liquid level is close to or below the lowest level line, the lack of water prompt assembly 18 will give a prompt to remind the user to add water to the water tank 11; when the liquid level is close to or above the highest level line, the full water prompt assembly A prompt is issued to remind the user to stop adding water to the water tank 11.
  • the water shortage prompt component 18 and the full water prompt component can have the same structure. The following takes the water shortage prompt component 18 as an example for illustration.
  • the water shortage prompt assembly 18 may include a float 181, a controller 182, and an alarm.
  • the float 181 has a first end and a second end.
  • the first end of the float 181 can be hinged to the inner surface of the water tank 11, and the second end of the float 181 can swing with the change of the liquid level. It can be provided with a magnet for emitting magnetic signals.
  • the density of the float 181 can be less than the density of the water in the water tank 11, that is, the float 181 can float on the liquid surface without binding force.
  • the buoyancy of the float 181 can be greater than the gravity of the float 181 and the magnet, so that the second end of the float 181 and the magnet can float on the liquid surface together.
  • Magnets include but are not limited to magnets.
  • the controller 182 may be arranged outside the water tank 11 and used for receiving magnetic signals and outputting control signals. It should be noted that the controller 182 may be arranged on the outer wall of the water tank 11, and the controller 182 may also be arranged on the base 5 (in FIG. 20, the arrangement of the controller 182 on the base 5 is shown as an example).
  • a mounting base may be provided on the base 5, and the controller 182 may be clamped to the mounting base to facilitate the maintenance and replacement of the controller 182.
  • the controller 182 may include a magnetic sensor, which is a sensor made using the relationship between magnetism and electricity (the principle of magnetoresistance effect, magnetoelectric effect, Hall effect, etc.). The magnetic sensor can trigger the signal generation by sensing the intensity of the magnetic field.
  • the alarm can be connected to the controller 182 in communication, and can respond to the control signal and issue an alarm prompt.
  • the alarm can alert the user through sound, flashing lights, or both sounds and lights.
  • the controller 182 can also control the opening and closing of the power unit 2, that is, the opening and closing of the water washing unit 1. In other words, when the liquid level is close to or lower than the lowest liquid level, the controller 182 can control the operation of the water washing part 1.
  • the controller 182 can also control the operation of the fan mentioned below. Understandably, the alarm and the controller 182 can be powered by an external power source or a battery. Among them, the external power supply can be obtained from the power supply of the water washing device.
  • the liquid level of the water in the water tank 11 continues to decrease as the time of use increases.
  • the float 181 can be in a horizontal state at this time, and this state can be maintained until the bottom surface of the first end of the float 181 is completely floating on the liquid surface.
  • the second end of the float 181 must remain floating on the liquid surface, so the float 181 rotates, and the magnet on the second end of the float 181 moves down accordingly.
  • the alarm when the magnet does not enter the sensing area of the controller 182, the alarm is in the off state; when the magnet moves down to the sensing area of the controller 182, the controller 182 sends out a control signal, and the alarm receives the control signal and sends a message to the user. Alarm prompt.
  • the height of the first end of the float 181 from the bottom surface of the water tank 11 and the height of the sensing area of the controller 182 can be set by the preset liquid level line to realize the low liquid level prompt.
  • a limiting protrusion 118 is provided on the inner wall of the water tank 11, and the limiting protrusion 118 is used to limit the height of the second end of the float 181.
  • the second end of the float 181 is restricted and will no longer continue to move upward. This can reduce the second end of the float 181 in the water tank.
  • the stroke in the 11 axis direction protects the float 181 and prolongs the service life of the float 181.
  • the limiting protrusion 118 includes a first plate connected to the inner wall of the water tank 11, and a second plate connected to the side wall of the first plate and the inner wall of the water tank 11. Both ends of the first plate body may be connected with the second plate body, so as to increase the connection strength between the first plate body and the inner wall of the water tank 11 and increase the structural strength of the limiting protrusion 118.
  • the float 181 itself may be a structure with a certain strength that is lighter than the water in the water tank 11, for example, it may be made of light wood materials.
  • the float 181 may also include a shell 1811 and a floating piece 1812.
  • the density of the floating piece 1812 is lower than the density of the liquid in the water tank 11.
  • the density of the shell 1811 may be greater than the density of water, but the floating piece 1812 and the shell 1811 are connected together.
  • the density can be less than the density of water, and the housing 1811 can provide installation and positioning for the floating member 1812.
  • the floating member 1812 includes, but is not limited to, a waterproof sponge, an airbag, and the like.
  • the floating member 1812 may be located above, below, on the left side or the right side of the housing 1811, and the floating member 1812 may also be located in the housing 1811.
  • the floating member 1812 can be located in the housing 1811, and the floating member 1812 is wrapped by the housing 1811, so as to maintain the shape of the floating member 1812 and facilitate the installation of the float 181.
  • a groove may be provided on the housing 1811, and the floating member 1812 may be exposed through the groove.
  • the housing 1811 is provided with grooves in order to reduce the weight of the housing 1811 and increase the buoyancy of the float 181.
  • the floating member 1812 when the floating member 1812 is located in the housing 1811, the floating member 1812 can be made of an elastic material.
  • the housing 1811 may be provided with a mounting cavity, the magnet may be located in the mounting cavity, and the mounting cavity may be used to separate the magnet from the floating member 1812.
  • the floating member 1812 may hinder the magnetic field strength of the magnet, so the magnet and the floating member 1812 are separated by the installation cavity to reduce the loss of the magnetic field strength of the magnet.
  • the installation cavity can be arranged elastically, and the magnet can be interference fit in the installation cavity.
  • a limit block can be connected to the installation cavity, the limit block can be used to limit the upper surface and the side wall of the magnet, and the other side of the magnet can be fixed by placing an interference fit with the installation cavity.
  • the float 181 can be detachably connected to the water tank 11 to facilitate the maintenance and replacement of the float 181.
  • a fixing protrusion may be provided on the bottom wall of the water tank 11, a mounting hole may be provided on the fixing protrusion, and a mounting protrusion may be provided on both sides of the float 181, and the mounting protrusion may be embedded and rotatably connected to the mounting hole.
  • an elastic rod may be connected between the housing 1811 and the mounting protrusion, and the elastic rod may have an elastic change along the axial direction of the mounting hole.
  • the inside of the water tank 11 may also be provided with sterilizing and anti-virus components, so as to improve the water purification effect.
  • the water tank 11 can be removed from the base 5 for adding water, or the water tank 11 can be added without removing the water tank 11 but by a specially provided water adding structure 19.
  • some of the second water retaining structure 15 may allow water flow from above to below, that is, one-way passage, especially allowing a large amount of water flow with a certain impact force to pass from Pass up and down.
  • the side wall of the water tank 11 should not be provided with water pipes as much as possible, so the upper end opening of the water tank 11 can be used to add water.
  • the air outlet of the water tank 11 is used for Water tank 11 is filled with water.
  • the water adding structure 19 includes but is not limited to the following possible implementation modes:
  • an air outlet hood 41 may be provided above the water tank 11 or the second water retaining structure 15, and the air outlet hood 41 may be provided with a water inlet 191 and a water inlet 191.
  • the flow direction of the water can be guided, and the water filling port 191 can be communicated with the opening of the water tank 11 to add water to the water tank 11.
  • FIG. 12 is an enlarged view of FIG. 11 at C.
  • the upper end of the water filling shell 192 can be provided with a water filling port 191 so that water can enter the water filling shell 192.
  • the lower end of the water filling shell 192 can be connected to the air outlet hood 41 so that the water in the water filling shell 192 enters the air outlet hood 41 and flows out of the air outlet hood 41 from the place where the air outlet hood 41 communicates with the water tank 11 and enters the water tank 11.
  • an air outlet channel 42 may be provided on the air outlet hood 41, and the air outlet channel 42 may communicate with the upper opening of the water tank 11 and the outside.
  • the water filling shell 192 may be in communication with the air outlet channel 42 so that the gas flows out from the air outlet channel 42.
  • the water filling shell 192 may be located above the air outlet channel 42, the water filling shell 192 may be arranged in a hollow shape, and the water outlet shell and the upper end shell of the air outlet channel 42 constitute the water filling channel.
  • a unidirectional restricting component is provided in the water filling shell 192 to prevent gas from flowing out of the water filling port 191 along the water filling shell 192.
  • the one-way restricting component housing includes a one-way plate 193 and a restricting assembly.
  • the one-way plate 193 can be hinged to the side wall of the water filling housing 192, and the restricting assembly can be used to restrict the one-way plate 193 from rotating only in the direction of the water flow.
  • the restricting component includes a first restricting protrusion 194 connected to the side wall of the water filling shell 192, and a side of the one-way plate 193 close to the water filling port 191 can abut against the first restricting protrusion 194 so as to block the one-way plate 193 rotation in the other direction.
  • the restricting component may further include a second restricting protrusion 195, which may be connected to the upper end surface of the air outlet channel 42 and extend toward the inside of the water filling shell 192. The side of the lower end of the one-way plate 193 facing the water filling port 191 can abut against the second restricting protrusion 195 so as to block the flow of gas from the lower end of the one-way plate 193.
  • the restricting component may further include a third restricting protrusion 196 which may be connected to the upper end of the water filling shell 192 and extending toward the inside of the water filling shell 192.
  • the upper end of the one-way plate 193 is rotatably connected to the third restricting protrusion 196 so as to block gas from flowing above the one-way plate 193.
  • the third restricting protrusion 196 and the one-way plate 193 may be connected in a sealed manner to further block the flow of gas.
  • the water filling shell 192 is detachably connected to the air outlet hood 41.
  • the connection manner between the water filling shell 192 and the air outlet hood 41 includes, but is not limited to, snap connection and fastener connection.
  • the device can perform drainage operation by itself to avoid adding too much water.
  • the following introduces several typical implementation methods of overflow treatment structure 9, but it is not limited to this:
  • FIG. 22 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of the cooperation of an overflow treatment structure, the water tank 11 and the base body 5, and FIG. 23 shows a partial three-dimensional schematic diagram of the base corresponding to the overflow treatment structure, as shown in FIG. 22
  • the side wall of the water tank 11 may be connected with a first drain pipe 71, and the first drain pipe 71 may be located above the highest water level line of the water tank 11 and below the air inlet provided in the water tank 11.
  • a diversion component may be provided outside the water tank 11 to convert the horizontal flow of water in the first drain pipe 71 into a vertical flow.
  • the diversion assembly may further include a water storage box 72, the first drain pipe 71 may be connected to the water storage box 72, the bottom end of the water storage box 72 may be provided with a water outlet, and the water outlet may be The outlet pipe is connected, and the excess water can be discharged to the designated location through the outlet pipe.
  • the base 5 is higher than the air inlet of the water tank 11, please refer to the description of the air inlet 3 below.
  • the gas can enter from below the base 5 and pass through the air inlet formed between the inner wall of the base 5 and the outer wall of the water tank 11.
  • the air duct allows gas to enter the water tank 11 from the air inlet provided in the water tank 11.
  • the first drain pipe 71 can be arranged in a place where there is no air inlet duct, that is, the place where the inner wall of the base body 5 and the outer wall of the water tank 11 are connected, and far away from the air inlet duct.
  • the side wall of the base body 5 may be provided with an elongated through hole 525, and the first drain pipe 71 may be inserted into the elongated through hole 525 from the inside to the outside.
  • the water tank 11 can be installed on the base body 5 in the manner described above. Therefore, when the water tank 11 is extracted, the water tank 11 needs to be lifted and then drawn out.
  • the elongated through hole 525 is provided to facilitate the water tank 11 When extracted from the base 5, space is provided for the movement of the first drain pipe 71.
  • one side of the water storage box 72 can be connected to the outer side wall of the base 5, and a reserved hole 721 can be provided on the side wall, and the first drain pipe 71 can pass through the reserved hole 721 into the water storage box 72.
  • the side wall of the water storage box 72 and the side wall of the base body 5 can be connected in a sealed manner to prevent water leakage.
  • an upper limit recess 521 may be provided on the side wall of the base 5, and the upper limit recess 521 may extend toward the inner side of the base 5, and the top wall of the water storage box 72 may abut against The upper wall of the upper limit recess 521 is to limit the height of the water storage box 72 along the axial direction of the water tank 11.
  • a plug-in plate may be provided on the top wall of the water storage box 72, and the plug-in plate can be bent upward relative to the top end of the water storage box 72.
  • An insertion hole 5211 may be provided on the top wall of the upper limit recess 521, and the insertion plate may be fitted to the insertion hole 5211 to limit the position of the water storage box 72 in the radial direction of the water tank 11.
  • “fit” means that the plug-in board can be penetrated with plug-in holes 5211.
  • a lower limit plate 526 can be further provided on the side wall of the base 5, and the lower limit plate 526 can be used to support the lower end of the water storage box 72.
  • the lower end of the water storage box 72 may be provided with a connecting seat 73
  • the connecting seat 73 may include a side wall and a bottom wall
  • the connecting seat 73 may be arranged in an angle shape
  • the connecting seat 73 is close to the base 5.
  • One side of the side wall is an opening, so that the connecting seat 73 and the base body 5 can be installed correspondingly.
  • the side wall of the connecting seat 73 and the side wall of the base body 5 can be connected by fasteners.
  • the side wall of the base body 5 may be provided with a column 522, and the column 522 may be provided with a reinforcing rib in the axial direction, so as to increase the strength of the column 522.
  • the fastener can be inserted through the connecting seat 73 and connected to the upright 522, so that the water storage box 72 and the side wall of the base 5 can be easily installed.
  • a mounting box 74 may be provided on the side wall of the connecting seat 73, and the above-mentioned controller 182 for prompting the water level may be installed in the mounting box 74.
  • the controller 182 can be snap-fitted or transitionally fitted in the installation box 74.
  • a accommodating cavity 523 may be provided on the side wall of the base 5, and the mounting box 74 may be inserted into the accommodating cavity 523, and the accommodating cavity 523 may provide support for the mounting box 74.
  • the installation box 74 and the accommodating cavity 523 can be transitionally matched, so as to realize the connection between the installation box 74 and the accommodating cavity 523.
  • FIG 24 shows a schematic diagram of a mounting box 74.
  • the mounting box 74 has an opening facing the base 5, the controller is clamped to the mounting box 74, and the signal receiving end of the controller is exposed on the mounting box. 74's opening.
  • the mounting box 74 includes a clamping plate 741 that is elastically arranged. An end of the clamping plate 741 close to the opening of the mounting box 74 is provided with a first limiting block 742.
  • the first limiting block 742 extends toward the inner side of the mounting box 74.
  • the bit block 742 is used to restrict the controller 182 from sliding out of the installation box 74.
  • the entrance end of the first limit block 742 is provided with an inclined surface along the movement direction of the controller 182 into the mounting box 74.
  • the inclined surface of the first limit block 742 gradually inclines toward the inner side of the mounting box 74 to guide the controller 182 .
  • the mounting box 74 is provided with a second limiting block 743, and at least part of the two sides of the controller 182 abuts against the first limiting block 742 and the second limiting block 743, respectively.
  • the installation box 74 is provided with a slideway 745, the controller 182 is slidably disposed on the slideway 745, and one end of the slideway 745 is connected to the opening of the installation box 74.
  • the entrance end of the slideway 745 is provided with a slope, and along the sliding direction of the controller 182, the slope gradually slopes toward the inner side of the installation box. In order to increase the area of the entrance end of the slideway, so that the controller 182 can enter the slideway.
  • the water storage box 72, the connection seat 73, and the installation box 74 can be integrally formed, that is, the diversion component can be integrally formed by injection molding, so as to improve the carrying capacity.
  • the diversion component can be used not only for overflow treatment but also for installing the controller 182, which not only facilitates installation but also makes reasonable use of space, and realizes the modularization of the device.
  • the bottom wall of the connecting seat 73 may be provided with a wire passing recess 731, and the wire passing recess 731 may extend toward the water storage box 72 and have an opening facing downward.
  • One end of the wire-passing recess 731 away from the base 5 may be provided as an opening.
  • the cable-passing recess 731 may be provided with a cable-passing hole on one side close to the installation box 74. It is understandable that the wires connected to the controller 182 can pass through the cable hole to enter the cable recess 731, and pass through the connecting seat 73 from the opening of the cable recess 731.
  • a platform 524 may be provided on the base 5, and the bottom wall of the connecting seat 73 may abut against the platform 524 so as to limit the position of the connecting seat 73 in the axial direction of the water tank 11, and the platform 524 may support the connecting seat 73.
  • the platform 524 can be provided with through holes, and the wires connected to the motor 22 and/or the fan can pass through the through holes, and pass through the connecting seat 73 along the opening of the wire recess 731, so as to realize the storage and clearness of the wires. The direction of the wires.
  • the diversion component may not be provided, and as shown in FIG. 5, a water outlet hole 722 is opened on the base 51 directly below the water tank 11, and a water outlet pipe is connected to the water outlet hole 722. Excess water can overflow from the air inlet into the gap between the base 5 and the water tank 11, and fall along the side wall of the base 5 to flow into the water outlet 722.
  • the overall wind flow of the air purification device may enter from the side and then flow out from the top or side, or it may enter from the bottom and then flow out from the top or side.
  • the difference in the air intake mode results in the difference of the air intake part 3, and the air intake part 3 is arranged on the base 5, so the shape of the base 5 corresponding to different air intake modes may be different.
  • the air intake modes are different, the structure of the power unit 2, the water tank 11 and the water washing unit 1 mentioned above may be the same.
  • the base body 5 includes the above-mentioned base 51 and a base shell.
  • the base 51 can be used for the installation of the power part 2, the water tank 11, and the washing part 1, and the base shell is used for the installation of the air intake part 3.
  • the base 51 is located in the base shell.
  • the structure of the base body 5 with different air intake modes can be roughly the same, that is, the installation of the power unit 2 and the base 51, the installation of the water tank 11 and the base 51, and the cooperation of the washing unit 1 and the base 51 can all follow the above Set up in the manner described.
  • the structure of the base shell of the base body 5 is different.
  • the base shell can be divided into a first base shell 53, a second base shell 54 and a third base shell 55 according to different air inlet modes.
  • the structure of the base shell may not be limited to the situations mentioned in this article, and it is just an example here.
  • the following firstly describes the air inlet 3 and the air outlet 4 of the air purification device in combination with the side air inlet and side air outlet methods.
  • the base shown in FIGS. 1 and 16 is taken as an example of an air purification device with air intake from the side.
  • the base 5 may include a first base shell 53 and a base 51.
  • the first base shell 53 It can include a top wall and a side wall.
  • the inner side of the top wall of the first base shell 53 may be connected to the outer periphery of the upper end side wall of the base 51, and the side wall of the first base shell 53 may be connected to the outer side of the top wall of the first base shell 53 and extend downward.
  • the above-mentioned radial rib 5124 may be provided between the side wall of the first base shell 53 and the side wall of the base 51, and a groove may be provided on the radial rib 5124 for power supply and/or communication. Through the cable, but also can achieve the purpose of weight reduction.
  • FIG. 17 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of a primary filter assembly 31.
  • the primary filter assembly 31 may include a filter layer 311 and a filter frame 312.
  • the filter layer 311 can be sleeved on the outside of the air inlet of the water tank 11, and the filter frame 312 can be sleeved on the outer side of the filter layer 311.
  • the air inlet can be arranged on the arc-shaped part, and the primary filter assembly 31 is arranged on the outside of the arc-shaped part of the water tank 11.
  • the arc part of the water tank 11 is defined as the front end of the water tank 11 and the vertical part of the water tank 11 is defined as the rear end of the water tank 11 in the following.
  • the filter frame 312 may be provided with through holes, so that external air enters through the through holes and passes through the filter layer 311 for primary filtration, and then enters the water tank 11 from the air inlet of the water tank 11 and is purified by the water curtain.
  • the filter frame 312 may include a side wall, an upper wall, and a bottom wall.
  • the upper wall of the filter frame 312 and the bottom wall of the filter frame 312 are respectively connected to both ends of the side wall of the filter frame 312, and both can face the water tank 11. ⁇ axial direction extension.
  • the side walls, upper wall, and bottom wall of the filter frame 312 define an installation space for installing the filter layer 311.
  • the upper wall of the filter frame 312 may be connected to the upper end of the water tank 11.
  • the upper end side wall of the water tank 11 is arranged in a stepped shape, so as to form a placement groove 112 for connecting the second water-retaining structure 15 and a limiting groove 113 for connecting the first water-retaining structure 16.
  • the bottom wall of the placement groove 112 can abut the upper wall of the filter frame 312 so as to limit the longitudinal height of the filter frame 312.
  • the bottom wall of the filter frame 312 can be connected to the upper end surface of the first base shell 53, and the first base shell 53 can be used to support the filter frame 312.
  • the length of the bottom wall of the filter frame 312 may exceed the thickness of the filter layer 311.
  • the bottom wall of the filter frame 312 is at least partially not covered by the filter layer 311.
  • a limiting plate 101 may be connected to the outer side wall of the water tank 11, and the limiting plate 101 may abut on the upper end surface of the bottom wall of the filter frame 312 beyond the filter layer 311, so as to realize the positioning of the filter frame 312 in the longitudinal direction.
  • the side wall of the water tank 11 may be connected with abutting protrusions 102, the abutting protrusions 102 may extend toward the outside of the water tank 11, and the abutting protrusions 102 may abut on one side of the filter layer 311 in the thickness direction. It can be understood that the side walls of the filter frame 312 and the abutting protrusions 102 can limit the displacement of the filter layer 311 in the thickness direction.
  • the upper end surface of the front end of the first base shell 53 may be provided with a defining protrusion 531, and the inner wall of the defining protrusion 531 may abut against the outer side wall of the front end of the filter frame 312 to facilitate filtering
  • the radial direction of the frame 312 is limited.
  • the filter frame 312 and the filter layer 311 may be designed in an arc shape, and the shape of the defining protrusion 531 may match the shape of the filter layer 311 so as to fit the outer side wall of the filter frame 312.
  • a positioning hole 532 may be provided on the limiting protrusion 531.
  • a positioning plate 313 may be connected to the outer side wall of the filter frame 312, and the positioning plate 313 may extend in a direction away from the axis of the water tank 11.
  • the positioning plate 313 can be connected to the positioning hole 532 in cooperation.
  • at least a part of the positioning plate 313 may penetrate through the positioning hole 532. It is understandable that when the filter frame 312 is installed on the first base shell 53, it is only necessary to extend the positioning plate 313 out of the positioning hole 532 to facilitate the positioning and installation of the filter frame 312.
  • the positioning hole 532 can be arranged in a direction parallel to or coincident with the symmetry axis of the first base shell 53, so that when the filter frame 312 is installed, only the positioning plate 313 on the filter frame 312 needs to be pushed through the positioning hole 532 in this direction. Yes, so that quick installation can be achieved.
  • the upper end surface of the rear end of the first base shell 53 may be provided with a defining recess 533, and the bottom wall of the filter frame 312 may be provided with an inserting protrusion 314.
  • the protrusion 314 can be matedly connected to the defining recess 533.
  • the insertion protrusion 314 may include a vertical section connected to the bottom wall of the filter frame 312, and a horizontal section bent toward the front end of the filter frame 312 relative to the vertical section.
  • the upper end of the defining recess 533 may be provided with an opening.
  • the defining recess 533 includes a groove wall and a groove bottom.
  • the groove wall defining the recess 533 at the front end may be provided with an insertion hole 534, and the horizontal section of the insertion protrusion 314 can be inserted into the insertion hole 534 , In order to realize the restriction and installation of the filter frame 312. Understandably, the horizontal section of the insertion protrusion 314 can slide on the bottom of the groove defining the recess 533 so as to limit the movement track of the filter frame 312.
  • the top surface of the front end of the first base shell 53 is provided with a front protrusion 535
  • the bottom wall of the filter frame 312 may be provided with a groove fitted to the front protrusion 535, so as to at least partially restrict the front and rear movement of the filter frame 312 .
  • the cross section of the front protrusion 535 gradually increases from top to bottom, that is, the front protrusion 535 is generally tapered.
  • the first base shell 53 may be provided with a storage recess 536 for installing the controller 182 of the water shortage indicator device (the corresponding surface of the base 51 is also provided with an opening), and the bottom wall of the filter frame 312 may be used to cover the storage
  • the recess 536 is used to restrict the wire connected to the controller 182.
  • a wiring hole 537 may be provided on the first base shell 53 to facilitate cable routing.
  • the air outlet portion 4 may include an air outlet hood 41 which may be hollow, and the lower end of the air outlet hood 41 may be provided with an opening communicating with the upper end of the water tank 11.
  • a fan may be provided in the air outlet hood 41 to guide gas into the water tank 11 and pass through the water curtain formed in the water tank 11.
  • the air outlet hood 41 is provided with an air outlet to facilitate the lead out of the gas.
  • the type of the fan may be centrifugal, axial flow, diagonal flow (mixed flow) or cross flow.
  • Figure 1 shows a centrifugal fan as an example, and other types of fans can be referenced.
  • the centrifugal fan 431 may include an impeller 4311 and a centrifugal motor 4312 for driving the impeller 4311.
  • the impeller 4311 may include a hub and a fan. Understandably, when the centrifugal motor 4312 is started, the impeller 4311 rotates, and the air in the flow channel (two adjacent fans can form a flow channel) moves outwards under the action of centrifugal force, and a vacuum degree is generated in the center of the impeller 4311.
  • the gas coming out of the upper opening of the water tank 11 is sucked into the impeller 4311, and the sucked gas is turned 90° at the entrance of the impeller 4311, and then enters the flow channel, and obtains kinetic energy and pressure energy under the action of the fan.
  • the air flow thrown from the flow channel enters the air outlet hood 41, and is discharged from the air outlet of the air outlet hood 41 after being concentratedly guided.
  • the fan blades can be arranged in an inclined manner, and the inclination direction of the fan blades can be opposite to the rotation direction of the impeller 4311.
  • the fan blade 4311 is set clockwise and the impeller 4311 rotates counterclockwise as an example.
  • the direction of rotation of the impeller 4311 can also be clockwise.
  • the setting method of the air outlet hood 41 can be referred to
  • the air outlet cover 41 may include an upper cover body 433 and a lower cover body 432, and the upper cover body 433 is detachably connected to the lower cover body 432.
  • the lower cover 432 may be provided with a central hole penetratingly arranged, and the lower end of the central hole may be connected to the upper end opening of the water tank 11.
  • the structure of the lower cover 432 will be described below from bottom to top.
  • the lower cover 432 may include a mounting part and a guide part, the mounting part may be used to connect to the water tank 11 and/or the filter frame 312, and the guide part may be used to guide the flow direction of the gas in the wind cover 41.
  • FIG. 27 shows a schematic diagram of the connection position of part of the water tank 11 and the lower cover 432.
  • the mounting portion may include a first mounting section 4321, and the first mounting section 4321 may be arranged in a ring shape , And can be sleeved on the outer side wall of the upper end of the water tank 11.
  • a vibration damping structure may be provided between the upper outer side wall of the water tank 11 and the inner wall of the first installation section 4321, and the vibration damping structure may include a vibration damping pad 65 to reduce noise at the connection position of the first installation section 4321 and the water tank 11.
  • the damping gasket 65 can also function as a seal, so as to block the thrown washing liquid from flowing to the outside of the lower cover 432.
  • the mounting portion may further include a second mounting section 4322
  • the second mounting section 4322 may include a side wall and an upper wall
  • the upper wall of the second mounting section 4322 may be opposite to each other.
  • the first mounting section 4321 is bent toward the outside (here, “outside” refers to the outside of the lower cover 432), and the side wall of the second mounting section 4322 can be bent downward relative to the upper wall of the second mounting section 4322.
  • the upper wall of the second installation section 4322 can abut against the upper end surface of the filter frame 312, and the side wall of the second installation section 4322 can be sleeved outside the upper end of the filter frame 312.
  • the upper and lower ends of the filter frame 312 are respectively restricted by the upper wall of the second installation section 4322 and the upper end surface of the first base shell 53.
  • the inner and outer sides of the filter frame 312 are respectively restricted by the water tank 11 and the second installation section.
  • the side wall of 4322 is restricted to realize the restriction of the height direction of the filter frame 312 by the second installation section 4322 and the restriction of the thickness direction of the filter frame 312 (ie, the radial direction of the filter frame 312).
  • a first reinforcement plate 4341 may be provided between the upper walls of the first installation section 4321 and the second installation section 4322 to strengthen the connection between the first installation section 4321 and the second installation section 4322 .
  • the guide portion may include a concentrated plate 4323 connected to the outer periphery of the upper end of the first mounting section 4321.
  • the concentrated plate 4323 may be provided with a through-hole concentrated hole, and the concentrated hole may correspond to the impeller 4311.
  • the gas entering the first installation section 4321 can pass through the concentrated hole to reduce the radius of the cross-sectional area of the lower cover 432, so that the gas is concentrated toward the air inlet of the impeller 4311, which is beneficial for the gas to enter the impeller 4311.
  • the guide portion may further include a first guide protrusion 4324 arranged in a ring shape.
  • the first guide protrusion 4324 is located below the impeller 4311 and can be connected to the circumferential direction of the concentrated hole, and can be bent toward the interior of the impeller 4311 for guiding
  • the purified gas enters the impeller 4311 of the centrifugal fan 431.
  • at least a part of the first guide protrusion 4324 is embedded in the impeller 4311 of the centrifugal fan 431 to facilitate the smooth connection between the radial section of the first guide protrusion 4324 and the impeller 4311.
  • the first installation section 4321, the concentration plate 4323, and the first guide protrusion 4324 may define a first guide air duct.
  • Fig. 28 shows a transverse cross-sectional view of Fig. 1 at the middle position of the first air outlet 43281.
  • the inner wall of the upper end of the first guide protrusion 4324 may be connected with a balance plate 4325 to remove the gas Distributed into several areas in order to achieve uniform wind.
  • "uniform outflow" means that the flow rate of the gas in the area located at the same radial position can be the same.
  • the equalization plate 4325 may include a circumferential edge strip 43251 and a radial edge strip 432542.
  • the circumferential edge strip 43251 may be arranged in a ring shape, and may be located in the first guiding protrusion 4324, and may be arranged concentrically with the first guiding protrusion 4324.
  • the radial edge strip 432542 can be arranged along the radial direction of the first guide protrusion 4324, and can connect the first guide protrusion 4324 and the circumferential edge strip 43251 together to form several regions.
  • the hub of the centrifugal fan 431 may include an air inlet section and a connecting section located above the air inlet section.
  • the air intake section is used to guide gas to enter, and the connecting section is used to install a centrifugal motor 4312.
  • the air inlet section and the connecting section can be connected by a fan. Wherein, from top to bottom, the air inlet section gradually curves toward the outer side of the impeller 4311, so as to guide the gas to the outer side of the impeller 4311.
  • the lower cover 432 is designed to fit the air inlet section of the centrifugal fan 431 more closely, or to guide the gas to the outside of the impeller 4311, which can be achieved by the following settings.
  • the guide portion may include a second guide protrusion 4326, the second guide protrusion 4326 may be arranged in a ring shape, and the second guide protrusion 4326 may be sleeved on the outside of the air inlet section of the hub and may be connected to the central The plate 4323 can be bent toward the outside of the impeller 4311.
  • a second guide channel 422 is defined between the second guide protrusion 4326 and the air inlet section of the hub.
  • the second guide protrusion 4326 may include an axial section and a radial section, and the axial section of the second guide protrusion 4326 may be connected to the concentrating plate 4323 and extend upward.
  • the radial section of the second guide protrusion 4326 may be curved toward the outside of the impeller 4311 relative to the axial section of the second guide protrusion 4326.
  • the air inlet section of the hub may be located between the first guide protrusion 4324 and the second guide protrusion 4326.
  • an air outlet 43231 may be provided on the concentrated plate 4323 located between the air inlet section of the hub and the second guide protrusion 4326. Understandably, a part of the gas from the water tank 11 passes through the above-mentioned outlet hole 43231 and enters the second guide channel 422, and another part of the gas from the water tank 11 can enter the impeller 4311 through the first guide air channel and pass through The flow passage of the impeller 4311 merges with the gas flowing out of the second guide passage 422.
  • the guide portion may further include a third guide protrusion 4327 and a fourth guide protrusion 4328, and the third guide protrusion 4327 may be connected to the second guide protrusion 4326 and extend toward the outside of the lower cover 432.
  • the fourth guide protrusion 4328 may be bent upward relative to the third guide protrusion 4327, and the fourth guide protrusion 4328 may be provided with a first air outlet 43281.
  • the third guide protrusion 4327 and the fourth guide protrusion 4328 can restrict the third guide channel 423 so as to guide the air out of the air hood 41 from the first air outlet 43281.
  • the upper end of the first air outlet 43281 located on the lower cover 432 can be opened, and the opening height of the first air outlet 43281 can be greater than the height of the flow passage of the impeller 4311, so as to ensure that it exits from the flow passage of the impeller 4311 The gas can enter the first air outlet 43281 smoothly.
  • one first air outlet 43281 may be provided, and multiple first air outlets 43281 may also be provided. It is very common that the first air outlet 43281 is provided with one, and it will not be repeated here.
  • the fourth guide protrusion 4328 between two adjacent first air outlet holes 43281, along the direction of rotation of the impeller 4311 starts from one first air outlet 43281. From one air outlet 43281 to the other first air outlet 43281, the fourth guide protrusion 4328 can be bent toward the outer circumference of the impeller 4311 gradually away, so as to gradually guide the flow direction of the gas and reduce the difference between the gas and the fourth guide protrusion 4328 Energy loss between.
  • the plurality of first air outlet holes 43281 may be arranged symmetrically, so as to balance the flow of the gas, so that the washing air maintains stability.
  • the water-washing air purification device of the present application can be applied to floor-standing air conditioning equipment, so it is suitable for the user's requirements on the air outlet height.
  • the air outlet of the air outlet hood 41 can be adjusted upward to expand the air outlet height.
  • the fourth guide protrusion 4328 may be provided with a side guide recess 43282, the side guide recess 43282 may extend toward the outside of the lower cover 432, and the side guide recess 43282 may be provided with a first There are two air outlets 43283, and the air outlet height of the second air outlet 43283 may be higher than the air outlet height of the first air outlet 43281.
  • the bottom wall of the side guide recess 43282 can be gradually inclined upward so as to guide the gas in the third guide channel 423 upward. It is understandable that the side walls of the side guide recess 43282 and the bottom wall thereof can define a fourth guide channel 424, which can be connected to the third guide channel 423, and can guide the gas upward and out of the second air.
  • the hole 43283 flows out.
  • an upper raising plate 43284 can also be provided in the first air outlet 43281.
  • the raising plate 43284 is gradually inclined upwards to obtain gas that moves upward obliquely.
  • the rising plates 43284 may be evenly arranged in the height direction of the first air outlet holes 43281 to facilitate uniform air outlet.
  • the fourth guide can be convex and can be bent in a direction gradually away from the outer circumference of the impeller 4311.
  • a reinforcing structure may be connected to the outer side of the second guiding protrusion 4326.
  • the reinforcing structure may be a second reinforcing plate 54344342.
  • the upper and lower ends of the second reinforcing plate 54344342 may be respectively connected to the first
  • the three guiding protrusions 4327 and the first guiding protrusion 4324 are used to improve the bearing capacity of the lower cover 432.
  • the distribution of the first air outlet 43281 and the second air outlet 43283 on the upper cover 433 may be symmetrically arranged, and the two first air outlets 43281 or the two second air outlets 43281 can be arranged symmetrically.
  • the air holes 43283 can be arranged on both sides of the symmetry axis, one is to improve the balance of the air outlet of the air outlet hood 41.
  • the two second air outlet holes 43283 may be located at the front end of the lower cover body 432
  • the two first air outlet holes 43281 may be located at the rear end of the lower cover body 432.
  • the front end of the lower cover 432 and the front end of the water tank 11 have the same direction, and the rear end of the lower cover 432 and the rear end of the water tank 11 have the same direction.
  • the fourth guide protrusion 4328 may have corresponding The curve turns and changes.
  • a brief description will be given below by taking the fourth guide protrusion 4328 between the two first air outlet holes 43281 as an example.
  • a first air inlet can be defined between two adjacent two fourth guide protrusions 4328 arranged in parallel.
  • the first air outlet 43281 may include a first end and a second end, and along the rotation direction of the impeller 4311, the first end may be located before the second end.
  • the second end of the first air outlet 43281 on the right side can be connected to the first end of the first air outlet 43281 on the left through the fourth guide protrusion 4328.
  • the fourth guide protrusion 4328 may include a first straight section 43285, an arc-shaped section 43286, and a second straight section 43287.
  • the first straight section 43285 may be connected to the second end of the first air outlet 43281 on the right side.
  • the second straight section 43287 can be connected to the first end of the second air outlet 43283, the first straight section 43285 and the second straight section 43287 can be arranged symmetrically, so as to determine two symmetrical first air outlets
  • the symmetrical reference of 43281; the arc can include a first end and a second end.
  • the first end of the arc section 43286 can be connected to the second straight section 43287, and the second end of the arc section 43286
  • the end may be bent toward a direction gradually approaching the impeller 4311, and the second end of the arc-shaped section 43286 may be lower than the first end of the arc-shaped section 43286.
  • the gas can smoothly enter the first air outlet 43281 on the left; the second end of the arc section 43286 and the first straight section 43285 may have a transition section 43288 so that the gas can enter the right side smoothly The first air outlet 43281.
  • the transition section 43288 has an obvious sudden change point, that is, an obvious angle change point. Therefore, in order to improve the structural strength of the fourth guiding protrusion 4328 at the transition section 43288 position, that is, to increase the sudden change point in the cross section.
  • the guiding part may also include a transition plate, which can connect the transition section 43288 and at least a part of the arc section 43286.
  • the upper cover 433 is described below:
  • the upper cover body 433 may include an upper cover plate 4331, and the upper cover plate 4331 may be used to cover the center hole on the lower cover body 432.
  • the fan can be suspended and mounted on the upper cover body 433 to reduce the influence of the vibration of the fan on the air outlet cover 41.
  • the upper cover body 433 and the lower cover body 432 can be connected by fasteners.
  • the upper end of the fourth guide protrusion 4328 of the lower cover body 432 can be connected with a lower cover plate 4329, and the lower cover plate 4329 can face the impeller 4311 The outer side of the extension.
  • At least part of the lower end of the upper cover plate 4331 can abut against the upper end of the lower cover plate 4329 and can be connected together by fasteners.
  • a lower cover flange 43291 may be connected to the lower cover plate 4329, the lower cover flange 43291 may extend upward, and a preset gap may be provided between the lower cover flange 43291 and the fourth guide protrusion 4328.
  • the side wall of the upper cover plate 4331 can be embedded in the lower cover flange 43291 so as to restrict the movement of the upper cover plate 4331.
  • an upper cover flange 43311 may be connected to the outer periphery of the upper cover plate 4331 to strengthen the structural strength of the upper cover plate 4331.
  • the upper cover flange 43311 can extend upward and be embedded in the lower cover flange 43291.
  • the lower end of the lower cover plate 4329 may be connected with a fastening protrusion 43292, and the fastener may pass through the upper cover plate 4331 and the lower cover plate 4329 in sequence, and be screwed to the fastening protrusion 43292.
  • an upper guide recess 4332 may be provided on the upper cover plate 4331, and the upper guide recess 4332 may extend upward to enlarge the first air outlet 43281 and/or the second air outlet 43283 The height and area of the wind.
  • the upper guide recess 4332 may include a first end and a second end, and the height of the upper guide recess 4332 gradually increases along the direction in which the impeller 4311 rotates. That is, the height of the second end of the upper guide recess 4332 is higher than the height of the first end of the upper guide recess 4332.
  • the second end of the upper guiding recess 4332 may be provided with an opening, and is connected to the first air outlet 43281 and/or the second air outlet 43283. Wherein, each of the first air outlet 43281 and/or the second air outlet 43283 is connected with a corresponding upper guide recess 4332.
  • the upper guide recess 4332 when the upper guide recess 4332 is not provided, the upper cover plate 4331, the third guide protrusion 4327, and the fourth guide protrusion 4328 define the third guide channel 423, the first air outlet 43281 and/or the second
  • the height of the air outlet 43283 must be lower than the height between the upper cover plate 4331 and the third guide protrusion 4327.
  • the gas can be guided upward, and the height of the first air outlet 43281 and/or the second air outlet 43283 can be increased.
  • FIG. 29 shows a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 25 at NN.
  • FIG. 25 As shown in FIG. 25, FIG. 26, and FIG. It is made of rubber material in order to have a vibration reduction effect.
  • fasteners can be used to pass through the upper cover 433 and the connecting gasket 66 to connect with the fan.
  • the upper cover 433 may be provided with an upper recess extending upward, and at least part of the fan may be embedded in the upper recess, so that the fan can be positioned through the upper recess.
  • a positioning groove may be provided at the upper end of the upper cover body 433, and a positioning flange 661 may be connected to the connecting gasket 66, and the positioning flange 661 may extend toward the upper cover body 433 and extend into the positioning groove.
  • the outer side wall of the positioning flange 661 can abut against the groove wall of the positioning groove.
  • the difficulty of determining the relative position of the fan relative to the upper cover 433 can be reduced by the shape design of the positioning groove.
  • the positioning groove may be an asymmetrical shape, and the positioning groove may also be a symmetrical shape, for example, the positioning groove may be in a "cross" shape.
  • a reinforcing column 662 may be connected to the connecting gasket 66, and at least two through holes may be provided on the upper cover body 433.
  • the reinforcing column 662 may include a first end and a second end, and the cross section of the first end of the reinforcing column 662 may be larger than the cross section of the second end of the reinforcing column 662.
  • the first end of the reinforcing column 662 may be located above the upper cover body 433, the lower end surface of the first end of the reinforcing column 662 may abut the outer circumference of the through hole, and the second end of the reinforcing column 662 may penetrate the upper cover body 433
  • the through hole is connected to the connection pad 66.
  • Fasteners can be inserted through the reinforcing column 662 and the connecting gasket 66 to be connected to the fan. In this way, the fan is isolated from the upper cover body 433 by the connecting gasket 66 and the reinforcing column 662.
  • the reinforcing column 662 and the connecting spacer 66 may be made of rubber material, so as to reduce the influence of the fan on the upper cover body 433.
  • FIG. 30 shows a perspective view of part of the upper cover 433.
  • the upper cover 433 can be provided with a reinforcing structure to strengthen The structural strength of the upper cover 433.
  • a reinforcing structure to strengthen The structural strength of the upper cover 433.
  • slots and holes such as through holes and positioning slots
  • a circle of first reinforcing protrusions 4343 is provided around the outer circumference of the slots and holes, so as to improve the position of the slots and holes. Structural strength.
  • the positioning grooves or multiple through holes provided on the upper cover body 433 may be concentrated in the middle position of the upper cover body 433.
  • Two adjacent first reinforcing protrusions 4343 may be connected by a fourth reinforcing protrusion 4349, and the fourth reinforcing protrusion 4349 may be arranged in an arc shape.
  • the upper cover body 433 may be connected with a second reinforcing protrusion 4344 arranged in a ring shape.
  • a plurality of through holes on the upper cover body 433 may be located inside the second reinforcing protrusion 4344, so as to further improve the structural strength of the slot and the hole position.
  • a first radial protrusion 4345 is connected between the outer side of the first reinforcing protrusion 4343 and the inner side of the second reinforcing protrusion 4344, and the first radial protrusion 4345 can not only connect the first reinforcing protrusion 4343 It is connected with the second reinforcing protrusion 4344 to improve the integrity of the upper cover body 433.
  • the first radial protrusion 4345 can also be used to support the first reinforcing protrusion 4343 and the second reinforcing protrusion 4344.
  • a third reinforcing protrusion 4346 arranged in a ring shape may be provided on the outer side of the upper recess provided on the upper cover body 433, so as to improve the structural strength of the upper recess position.
  • the through hole or the mounting groove on the upper housing 1811 can be provided on the upper recess to facilitate the connection between the upper cover 433 and the fan.
  • a second radial protrusion 4347 is provided between the third reinforcing protrusion 4346 and the second reinforcing protrusion 4344.
  • the first radial protrusion 4345 and the second radial protrusion 4347 may be evenly distributed in the circumferential direction of the second reinforcing protrusion 4344 and the third reinforcing protrusion 4346, and the second radial protrusion 4347 and the first radial protrusion 4347
  • the radial protrusions 4345 can be arranged in a staggered manner.
  • the second radial protrusion 4347 may extend toward the radial direction of the second reinforcing protrusion 4344. Understandably, the second radial protrusion 4347 may also connect the first reinforcing protrusion 4343 and the second reinforcing protrusion 4344 together, so as to further improve the structural strength of the upper cover body 433.
  • a third radial protrusion 4348 is further provided on the upper cover body 433, and the third radial protrusion 4348 can be connected to the third reinforcing protrusion 4346 and extend toward the outer periphery of the outer cover body, so as to improve the upper cover body.
  • Fig. 31 shows an enlarged view of Fig. 26 at F.
  • a capacitor starter 4334 may be provided on the upper cover 433 to help start the fan.
  • a placement cavity is provided on the upper cover 433 to restrict and fix the capacitor starter 4334.
  • the placement cavity may be defined by a plurality of placement protrusions 4335 connected to the upper cover 433.
  • the at least two placement protrusions 4335 are made of elastic material so as to abut against the side wall of the capacitor starter 4334 to fix the capacitor starter 4334.
  • the height of the placement protrusion 4335 can be lower than the height of the capacitor starter 4334 to facilitate installation or maintenance with the operator.
  • the upper ends of the at least two opposing placement protrusions 4335 can each be connected to a clamping block 4336, and the clamping block 4336 can extend toward the capacitor starter 4334, so as to limit the movement of the capacitor starter 4334 in the height direction.
  • the opposite ends of the capacitor starter 4334 can be clamped to two clamping blocks 4336.
  • the end of the clamping block 4336 away from the placement protrusion 4335 may have a guide slope 1613. From the outer circumference of the capacitor starter 4334 to the axis of the capacitor starter 4334, the guide slope 1613 may gradually extend downward to guide the start of the capacitor. Placement of 4334. It is worth noting that the placement protrusion 4335 or the clamping block 4336 to which the clamping block 4336 is connected may have an elastic displacement along the extension direction of the clamping block 4336.
  • the upper cover 433 can also be provided with a plurality of ring-shaped reinforcing protrusions, and radial protrusions can pass between two adjacent reinforcing protrusions. connect.
  • the radial protrusions and the ring-shaped reinforcing protrusions may be provided with wire passing grooves so that the cables used for power supply and/or communication can pass through.
  • the upper cover body 433 may also be provided with a fixing protrusion 4337 to facilitate the fixing of the cable.
  • the fixing protrusions 4337 can be arranged in pairs.
  • the fixing protrusion 4337 may include a first end and a second end. The first end of the fixing protrusion 4337 may be connected to the upper cover 433, and the second end of the fixing protrusion may extend upward. The second end can be bent downward relative to the first end of the fixing protrusion 4337.
  • the two opposite surfaces of the second ends of the two fixing protrusions 4337 are arranged obliquely, specifically, they are gradually inclined downward from the outer side of the fixing protrusion to the inner side of the fixing protrusion, so as to be used for power supply and/or communication.
  • the cable is inserted between the two fixing protrusions 4337 from top to bottom.
  • the dust-laden air from the outside enters the primary filter assembly 31 from the side under the guidance of the centrifugal fan 431, and passes through the primary filter assembly 31.
  • the filter assembly 31 After the filter assembly 31 performs preliminary filtering, it enters the water tank 11 from the air inlet of the water tank 11, and contacts with the washing liquid thrown out in the water tank 11 to obtain purified gas.
  • the purified gas flows out of the water tank 11 from the upper end of the water tank 11, enters the impeller 4311 of the centrifugal fan 431 and turns, and exits from the first air outlet 43281 and/or the second air outlet 43283 on the air outlet hood 41.
  • Fig. 32 is a three-dimensional schematic diagram of another air purification device.
  • an air purification device with air intake from below includes an air inlet 3, a water washing part 1 and an air outlet 4 according to the flow direction of the gas.
  • the air inlet 3 is located at the bottom of the entire device, the water washing portion 1 is located above the air inlet 3, and the air outlet 4 is located above the water washing portion 1.
  • the dust-containing gas from the outside enters the air inlet 3 from below, and is guided into the water tank 11 of the washing part 1 through the air inlet 3, purified by the washing components in the water tank 11 to obtain clean gas, and the clean gas flows out through the air outlet 4 to outside world.
  • the difference between the downward air intake and the lateral air intake lies in the introduction of dust-containing gas into the water tank 11, that is, the air intake channel is different.
  • the dust-containing gas can enter the water tank 11 directly from the air inlet provided on the side wall of the water tank 11;
  • the guide of the air inlet 3 enters the water tank 11 from the air inlet of the water tank 11.
  • the fan can be installed in the lower air inlet 3 or the upper air outlet 4. When the fan is located at the lower air inlet 3, the center of gravity of the air purification device can be lowered, making the device more stable.
  • the fan is arranged in the air inlet 3 as an example to illustrate the distribution of the components of the device when the air is fed from below.
  • the installation methods of the fan and the motor 22 include but are not limited to the following possible implementation methods:
  • FIG. 33 shows a partial cross-sectional view of the power part of an air purification device.
  • the motor 22 is a dual-axis motor 29, and the dual-axis motor 29 includes a dual-axis motor main body 291.
  • the fan may include a fan 32.
  • the first motor shaft 292 extends upward from the dual-axis motor main body 291, and the second motor shaft 293 extends downward from the dual-axis motor main body 291.
  • the first motor shaft 292 can be connected to the first helical gear 23 so that the barrel 12 rotates and throws water to form a water curtain in the water tank 11.
  • the second motor shaft 293 is connected to the fan 32 so as to drive the fan 32 to rotate, thereby sending the dust-containing gas into the upper water tank 11 from below. It is understandable that both the first helical gear 23 and the fan 32 can be driven by the same motor 22, which can reduce cost and weight, and is easy to install.
  • the dual-axis motor 29 can be suspended and mounted on the base 51, and the specific implementation can refer to the installation of the motor 22 and the base 51 above. That is, the mounting claws 223 are uniformly arranged on the outer circumference of the main body 291 of the biaxial motor, and the mounting claws 223 may be provided with through holes, and the fasteners may pass through the through holes to be connected to the base 51. In addition, since the fan 32 is connected to the lower end of the biaxial motor main body 291, the weight is increased. In order to improve the stability of the connection, the distance between the through holes on at least two mounting claws 223 and the side wall of the motor 22 seat is set to be unequal.
  • a plurality of first mounting claws 223 may be uniformly arranged in the circumferential direction of the two-axis motor main body 291, and a second mounting claw 223 may be provided between two adjacent first mounting claws 223.
  • a first through hole may be provided on the 223, and a second through hole may be provided on the second mounting claw 223.
  • the distance between the first through hole and the side wall of the biaxial motor main body 291 is smaller than the distance from the second through hole to the biaxial motor main body 291 The distance of the side wall.
  • the first mounting claw 223 and the second mounting claw 223 may be arranged at the same axial position or different axial positions of the biaxial motor main body 291.
  • the fan 32 may include a fan 32 casing, and at least two fan 32 blades 161 connected to the side wall of the fan 32 casing.
  • the fan 32 housing can be sleeved on the lower end of the biaxial motor main body 291, and the fan 32 can rotate relative to the biaxial motor main body 291.
  • a stop ring 294 is sleeved on the second motor shaft 293, and an end of the second motor shaft 293 away from the dual-axis motor main body 291 can penetrate the fan 32 housing from top to bottom.
  • the end of the second motor shaft 293 passing through the casing of the fan 32 can be screwed with a nut 295, and the stop ring 294 can abut against the upper end of the bottom wall of the casing of the fan 32.
  • the stop ring 294 can abut against the upper end of the bottom wall of the casing of the fan 32.
  • the bottom wall of the casing of the fan 32 can be clamped between the stop ring 294 and the nut 295.
  • a reinforcement block 233 is optionally provided on the fan 32 housing.
  • the reinforcing block 233 may include a first end and a second end.
  • the first end of the reinforcing block 233 may be located in the casing of the fan 32, and the stop ring 294 may abut against the upper end surface of the reinforcing block 233.
  • the second end of the reinforcing block 233 can pass through the fan 32 casing and can abut against the upper end surface of the nut 295.
  • the end of the second motor shaft 293 away from the main body 291 of the dual-axis motor can pass through the reinforcing block 233 and be screwed to the nut 295.
  • a reinforcing rib 1651 may be provided between the side wall of the reinforcing block 233 and the bottom wall of the fan 32 casing, so as to increase the strength of the reinforcing block 233.
  • the connection between the first motor shaft 292 and the first helical gear 23 can refer to the above description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the radius of the casing of the fan 32 can be gradually increased from bottom to top, so as to guide the air coming in from below to move to the outside and above of the fan.
  • the fan 32 may also have other structures, and this is just an example for illustration, and the structure of the fan 32 is not specifically limited. It is only necessary that the fan 32 can move the gas entering the base 5 from below to move upward.
  • FIG. 34 shows an exploded view of an air purification device.
  • the base 5 includes a second base shell 54 and a base 51.
  • the second base shell 54 can be arranged in a cylindrical shape, and the two The end can be opened.
  • the lower end of the base 51 is used to install the motor 22 and the fan, and the upper end of the base 51 is used to place the water tank 11.
  • the second base shell 54 may be sleeved on the outside of the base 51, and a preset gap may be provided between the second base shell 54 and the base 51, so that the wind coming in from below the second base shell 54 can pass from the water tank through the preset gap.
  • the air inlet of 11 enters into the water tank 11.
  • the direction of arrow X indicates the width direction of the second base shell 54
  • the direction of arrow Y indicates the length direction of the second base shell 54
  • the direction of arrow Z indicates the height direction of the second base shell 54.
  • the water tank 11 can be drawn away from the base 51 along the length direction of the second base shell 54.
  • Fig. 35 shows a longitudinal three-dimensional cross-sectional view of Fig. 32.
  • the second base shell 54 may include a bearing section 541, a fan mounting section 542, and a base 51 mounting section in order from bottom to top.
  • the load-bearing section 541 is located at the bottom of the whole device, and is used to load the weight of the biaxial motor 29, the fan, and the water tank 11 in the device; the fan mounting section 542 corresponds to the position where the fan is installed to achieve a better air intake effect;
  • the mounting section 51 is used to fix the base 51; and the mounting section of the base 51 can also be used to guide gas into the water tank 11.
  • FIG. 37 shows a partial transverse three-dimensional cross-sectional view of the second base shell 54.
  • the bearing section 541 may be arranged in a hollow prismatic shape, and the outer side wall of the bearing section 541 may be provided with reinforcement Structure in order to improve the bearing capacity of the bearing section 541.
  • the side wall of the load-bearing section 541 may be provided with a first load-bearing flange 5411 arranged along the axial direction, so as to improve the ability of the side wall of the load-bearing section 541 to bear axial force.
  • the first bearing flange 5411 may be provided with multiple or only one.
  • FIG. 34 shows a plurality of first bearing flanges 5411 as an example, and the plurality of first bearing flanges 5411 may be evenly distributed on the side wall of the bearing section 541.
  • the outer circumference of the side wall of the load-bearing section 541 may be connected with an outer peripheral flange 5412 to strengthen the circumference of the side wall.
  • Both ends of the first bearing flange 5411 can be connected to the outer peripheral flange 5412 respectively, so as to improve the integrity of the plurality of first bearing flanges 5411 and further increase the force of the side wall of the bearing section 541.
  • the upper end of the side wall of the supporting section 541 may be provided with a supporting groove 5413, and the upper end of the first supporting flange 5411 may extend into the supporting groove 5413, so as to improve the gap between the supporting protrusion and the side wall of the supporting section 541. Connection strength.
  • a second bearing flange 5414 may be connected to the inner wall of the bearing section 541, and the second bearing flange 5414 may be arranged along the axial direction of the bearing section 541, so as to further improve the structural strength of the bearing section 541.
  • the cross-section of the second bearing flange 5414 gradually decreases.
  • an inlet grill 544 may also be provided on the bearing section 541 to isolate the fan blades 43111 and prevent the fan blades 43111 from hurting people.
  • the air inlet grille 544 may be arranged in the carrying section 541 and may be located under the fan, so as to allow gas to enter and block the penetration of human hands.
  • a filter screen can be provided on the air inlet grill 544 so that the gas can be primary filtered.
  • the inlet grill 544 may include a fixing ring 5441 arranged in a ring shape, wherein the fixing ring 5441 may be provided with a first grid bar 5442 and a second grid bar 5443 arranged in two directions. The first grid bar 5442 and the second grid bar 5443 can be arranged to intersect to form a mesh for uniform gas distribution.
  • the first lattice bars 5442 may be arranged along the radial direction of the bearing section 541, and the second lattice bars 5443 may be arranged along the circumferential direction of the bearing section 541.
  • One or more second grid bars 5443 can be provided.
  • the multiple second grid bars 5443 can be arranged concentrically.
  • the fixing ring 5441 is detachably connected to the load-bearing section 541.
  • the fixing ring 5441 can be inserted into the carrying section 541 along the length direction of the carrying section 541, so that when disassembling or installing, the fixing ring 5441 can move along the length of the carrying section 541 so as to be separated from or passing through the carrying section 541.
  • the movement direction of the water tank 11 from the base 51 and the movement direction of the fixing ring 5441 from the base 51 can be set to be consistent.
  • Fig. 38 shows a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the second base shell 54 at the fixing ring 5441.
  • an upper flange 5415 and a lower flange 5415 may be connected to the inner wall of the bearing section 541 in the width direction.
  • a preset gap may be provided between the upper flange 5415 and the lower flange 5416.
  • the fixing ring 5441 can extend between the upper flange 5415 and the lower flange 5416, and the fixing ring 5441 is restricted between the upper flange 5415 and the lower flange 5416, so as to realize the positioning and installation of the fixing ring 5441.
  • both ends of the length direction of the bearing section 541 may be sequentially provided with first side walls and The second side wall. That is, when the fixing ring 5441 is installed to the carrying section 541, the fixing ring 5441 passes through the first side wall and is connected to the second side wall.
  • the upper flange 5415 may be located below the lower flange 5416, the lower flange 5416 may include an introduction section 54161 and a positioning section 54162 connected to the introduction section 54161.
  • the introduction section 54161 is close to the bearing section 541
  • the first side wall is provided.
  • the introduction section 54161 may gradually incline upward.
  • the introduction section 54161 can play a guiding role. When the fixing ring 5441 enters the bearing section 541, it can incline upward along the introduction section 54161 into the preset gap formed by the positioning section 54162 and the upper flange 5415.
  • a clamping block may be provided on the side wall of the bearing section 541 between the upper flange 5415 and the lower flange 5416, and the fixing ring 5441 may be provided with an inner recess 5444 extending toward the inner side of the fixing ring 5441.
  • the clamping block can be matedly connected to the inner recess 5444, so as to realize the clamping and fixing between the fixing ring 5441 and the inner wall of the carrying section 541.
  • one end of the fixing ring 5441 extending into the carrying section 541 can abut against the second side wall of the carrying section 541 so as to limit the position of the fixing ring 5441. It is worth noting that, as shown in FIG. 37, in combination with the description of the first bearing flange 5411 and the second bearing flange 5414 mentioned above, the first bearing flange 5411 can be arranged in the width direction of the bearing section 541. The outside of the side wall to facilitate the installation of the installation ring.
  • the second bearing flange 5414 can be arranged on the inner side of the second side wall of the bearing section 541, and the upper shell of the second bearing flange 5414 is provided with a locking groove, and the end of the fixing ring 5441 extending into the bearing section 541 can be clipped to the card. Groove in order to further realize the fixing of the fixing ring 5441 and the bearing section 541. Wherein, at least one second bearing flange 5414 may not be provided with a slot, so as to maintain the structural strength of the side wall of the bearing section 541. At this time, one end of the fixing ring 5441 extending into the carrying section 541 can abut against the inner side of the second carrying protrusion.
  • an extraction protrusion 5445 may be provided on the fixing ring 5441, and the extraction protrusion 5445 may be located outside the carrying section 541 for the user to extract.
  • the first side wall of the supporting section 541 may be provided with an insertion groove 5417.
  • the opening size of the insertion groove 5417 may be larger than the height of the fixing ring 5441, so that the fixing ring 5441 penetrates the insertion groove 5417.
  • the fixing ring 5441 can penetrate into the inside of the carrying section 541 from the insertion groove 5417.
  • the lower end surface of the insertion groove 5417 can be flush with the introduction section 54161, so that the fixing ring 5441 smoothly transitions from the insertion groove 5417 to the introduction section 54161.
  • an end of the fixing ring 5441 close to the first side wall of the carrying section 541 can be connected with a locking block 5446, and the locking block 5446 can abut against the lower end surface of the insertion groove 5417, so as to restrict the fixing ring 5441 from being close to the first side of the carrying section 541.
  • One side wall is in the position of the insertion groove 5417.
  • the retaining block 5446 can slide relative to the insertion slot 5417, so as to play a guiding role when the fixing ring 5441 is separated from the bearing section 541.
  • a primary filter assembly 31 may be provided in the carrying section 541.
  • the structure of the primary filter assembly 31 may be the above-mentioned filter screen provided on the air inlet grille 544, or it may be the structure described below.
  • FIG. 39 shows a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a carrying section 541 and the primary filter assembly 31 thereon
  • FIG. 41 shows a partial perspective view of a carrying section 541 and the primary filter assembly 31; FIGS. 39 and As shown in 41, a filter groove is provided on the bearing section 541, and the filter groove is arranged along the length direction of the bearing section 541.
  • the primary filter assembly 31 includes a filter shell 315 and a filter core 316 arranged in the filter shell 315.
  • the filter shell 315 has a plurality of through holes for gas to pass through.
  • the primary filter assembly 31 is inserted into the filter tank along the length direction of the bearing section 541.
  • the bottom of the filter tank is used to support the filter shell 315, and the tank wall of the filter tank is used to limit the circumferential position of the filter shell 315.
  • a pull handle 317 may be provided on the filter housing 315 to provide a force application position for the user to facilitate the primary filter assembly 31 to be drawn out.
  • FIG. 40 shows an enlarged view of FIG. 39 at G.
  • the upper limiting block 318 may extend from the tank wall of the filter tank toward the inside of the filter tank.
  • an introduction block 3181 may be connected to the upper restriction block 318, and the introduction block 3181 may be bent upward relative to the upper restriction block 318.
  • the introduction block 3181 can gradually face the upper limiting block 318 and incline downward.
  • two adjacent side walls of the upper limiting block 318 may be connected to two adjacent groove walls, respectively, so as to improve the connection strength of the upper limiting block 318.
  • Figure 42 shows an enlarged view of Figure 41 at H.
  • a lower limiting block 319 is provided on the bottom of the filter tank, and a lower limiting recess is provided on the upper shell of the filter housing 315.
  • the lower limiting block 319 can be clamped to the lower limiting groove 3151, so as to realize the positioning restriction between the filter housing 315 and the filter groove along the length direction of the bearing section 541.
  • the first bearing flange 5411 can be connected to the two outer sides of the bearing section 541 in the width direction, and the second bearing flange 5414 can be connected to the bearing section.
  • the length direction of the 541 is an outer side wall, and the second bearing flange 5414 is gradually inclined toward the rear end of the bearing section 541 from top to bottom, so as to improve the stability of the bearing section 541.
  • the carrying section 541 can not only carry the weight of the entire device, but also provide installation space for the primary filter assembly 31.
  • the side wall of the supporting section 541 can restrict the first gas inlet passage.
  • the fan installation section 542 can be sleeved on the outside of the fan.
  • the fan installation section 542 can include a first section and a second section connected to the first section.
  • the first section of the fan installation section 542 can be Connected to the upper end of the load-bearing section 541, from top to bottom, the first section of the fan mounting section 542 gradually curves toward the inner side of the fan mounting section 542.
  • the second section of the fan installation section 542 can be arranged in a cylindrical shape.
  • the section radius of the second section of the fan installation section 542 is smaller than the section radius of the bearing section 541, so that when the gas passes through the fan, the change of the section makes the fan installation
  • the second section of section 542 is more attached to the fan, so that the gas is concentrated to the fan, so that the fan can guide the gas.
  • the first section of the fan installation section 542 can function as a connection between the load-bearing section 541 and the second section of the fan installation section 542, so as to guide the gas toward the middle.
  • the outer side of the fan installation section 542 can be connected with a stabilizing plate 5421, and the stabilization plate 5421 can span the first section and the second section of the fan installation section 542, so as to improve the load-bearing capacity of the fan installation section 542. ability.
  • a fixing plate 545 may be connected to the fan mounting section 542, and the fixing plate 545 may extend from the side wall of the fan mounting section 542 toward the outside.
  • the fixing plate 545 can be connected with other components by fasteners, so that the fan mounting section 542 can be connected with other components.
  • the fixing plate 545 is provided with through holes or threaded holes, and the fixing plate 545 may be provided with hole ribs 5451.
  • the hole ribs 5451 may be arranged around the outer circumference of the through hole or the threaded hole to increase the through hole. Or the structural strength at the location of the threaded hole.
  • a peripheral rib 5452 may also be provided on the fixing plate 545, and the peripheral rib 5452 may be arranged around the outer circumference of the fixing plate 545, so as to improve the structural strength of the fixing plate 545.
  • the fixed plate 545 may also be provided with criss-crossed stabilizing ribs 5453, the stabilizing ribs 5453 can have at least two directions, and the stabilizing ribs 5453 in one direction can have at least one stabilizing rib 5453 in the other direction. Intersect, so as to further improve the structural strength of the fixing plate 545.
  • the hole ribs 5451, the peripheral ribs 5452, and the stabilizing ribs 5453 can be connected in pairs.
  • at least one stabilizing rib 5453 is connected to the hole rib 5451 or the peripheral rib 5452, so as to improve the integrity of the fixing plate 545.
  • a connecting rib 5455 may be provided between the fixed plate 545 and the stabilized plate 5421, and the connecting rib 5455 may extend from the stabilized plate 5421 toward the fixed plate 545, which can not only support the fixed plate 545, but also increase the fan installation section 542 Integrity.
  • bearing section 541 or the mounting section of the base 51 may also be provided with the fixing plate 545 mentioned above, so as to realize the connection between the bearing section 541 or the mounting section of the base 51 and other components.
  • the fan installation section 542 is used to gradually guide the gas to the position of the fan, so as to improve the efficiency of the fan.
  • the side wall of the fan installation section 542 may define a second air inlet channel 34, and the second air inlet channel 34 is in communication with the first air inlet channel 33.
  • the installation section of the base 51 will be described below.
  • the mounting section of the base 51 can be arranged in a cylindrical shape.
  • the mounting section of the base 51 can be located outside the base 51.
  • the mounting section of the base 51 can be provided with a fixing piece 5431. Both sides of the fixing piece 5431 can be connected to the base respectively.
  • the side wall of the base 51 and the mounting section of the base 51 are used to realize the installation of the base 51 and the mounting section of the base 51.
  • One or more fixing pieces 5431 may be provided.
  • a plurality of fixings may be evenly distributed in the circumferential direction of the base 51, so as to improve the stability of the connection between the base 51 and the mounting section of the base 51, and to evenly distribute the gas.
  • the cross-sectional radius of the mounting section of the base 51 is larger than the cross-sectional radius of the fan mounting section 542, so as to increase the gas flow channel.
  • the lower end of the mounting section of the base 51 may be provided with an extension plate 5432, and the extension plate 5432 may extend from the mounting section of the base 51 toward the second section of the fan mounting section 542 and be connected to the upper end of the second section of the fan mounting section 542 .
  • a preset distance 5436 is provided between the extension plate 5432 and the side wall of the base 51 to facilitate the passage of gas.
  • the upper end surface of the above-mentioned stabilizing plate 5421 can be connected to the extension plate 5432, so as to improve the connection strength between the mounting section of the base 51 and the fan mounting section 542.
  • the lower end of the fixing piece 5431 can be connected to the upper end surface of the extension plate 5432, and the extension plate 5432 can support the fixing piece 5431, so as to improve the structural strength of the fixing piece 5431.
  • FIG. 36 shows an enlarged view of FIG. 35 at I.
  • the second section of the fan mounting section 542 may be connected with a wind guide protrusion 5422, and the wind guide protrusion 5422 may face Extend from above to guide the gas upward.
  • the upper end of the mounting section of the base 51 can exceed the upper end surface of the air inlet of the water tank 11, and can be covered by the lower end of the air outlet hood 41 and the upper end of the water tank 11, and the upper end of the mounting section of the base 51, so The gas entering the installation section of the base 51 can enter the water tank 11 from the air inlet opened on the side wall of the water tank 11.
  • connection between the air outlet hood 41 and the mounting section of the base 51 can be referred to the following description.
  • the description of the air outlet hood 41 and the upper end of the water tank 11 can be referred to above.
  • the installation section of the base 51 may be provided with an air inlet recess 5433 near the rear end of the water tank 11, and the air inlet recess 5433 may extend toward the inner side of the installation section of the base 51. Setting the air inlet recess 5433 can not only reduce the weight of the second base, but also guide the gas.
  • FIG. 43 shows a top view of a base 5.
  • the extension plate 5432, the mounting section of the base 51 between the two air inlet recesses 5433, the side wall of the bottom wall, the side wall of the water tank 11, and the front wall of the two air inlet recesses 5433 can define the third gas
  • the air inlet channel 35 and the third air inlet channel 35 are connected to the second air inlet channel 34. Therefore, the third air inlet channel 35 should include the position corresponding to the air inlet.
  • the two air inlet recesses 5433 can be symmetrically arranged along the axis of the water tank 11 to facilitate the balance and symmetry of the base 5.
  • a reinforcing plate 5434 may be provided in the air inlet recess 5433 to increase the strength of the air inlet recess 5433.
  • both ends of the reinforcing plate 5434 may be connected to opposite side walls of the air inlet recess 5433, and one side of the reinforcing plate 5434 may be connected to the bottom wall of the air inlet recess 5433.
  • a plurality of reinforcing plates 5434 may be provided along the axial direction of the second base shell 54 to further improve the structural strength of the air inlet recess 5433.
  • the upper end of the mounting section of the base 51 may be provided with a limiting groove 5435, and at least a part of the upper end of the water tank 11 is located on the limiting groove 5435, so as to limit the position of the upper end of the water tank 11.
  • the upper end of the water tank 11 is provided with a placing groove 112, the outer side wall and the bottom wall of the placing groove 112 can abut against the limiting groove 5435, so as to realize the positioning of the upper end of the water tank 11.
  • the outside air enters the inside of the second base shell 54 under the action of the fan. After the air passes through the first air inlet channel 33 enclosed by the side wall of the carrying section 541, it is evenly distributed by the air inlet grill 544 above it, and filtered by the filter on the air inlet grill 544, and enters the diagonal flow fan 32 and the installation of the fan.
  • the side wall of the section 542 forms a second air inlet channel 34.
  • the gas coming out of the second air inlet channel 34 enters the side wall of the installation section of the base 51 and the third air inlet channel 35 surrounded by the side wall of the base 51, and is evenly distributed by the fixing piece 5431 and enters the installation section of the base 51.
  • the side walls and the side walls of the water tank 11 and the enclosed fourth air inlet channel 36 are inside.
  • the gas enters the interior of the water tank 11 from the air inlet of the water tank 11 from the fourth air inlet channel 36. In this way, the flow of gas in the second base shell 54 is completed.
  • the fan and the motor 22 may be independent of each other when the air is fed from below, that is, the fan and the motor 22 may not share a driving source. A brief description of this situation is given below.
  • Fig. 44 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of another air purification device
  • Fig. 46 shows a partial exploded schematic diagram of Fig. 44
  • Fig. 47 shows a longitudinal three-dimensional schematic diagram of Fig. 44, as shown in Figs. 46 and 47, another type of air purification
  • the base 5 of the device includes a base 51 and a third base shell 55.
  • the third base shell 55 is sleeved on the outside of the base 51 and is used to support the base 51.
  • the third base shell 55 has an air inlet facing downward, and an air inlet channel for gas to pass is provided between the third base shell 55 and the base 51.
  • an isolation cover 555 is connected to the bottom end of the base 51, and the motor 22 includes a motor main body 222 and a motor shaft 221.
  • the isolation cover 555 is sleeved on the outside of the motor main body 222 and is used to isolate the motor main body 222 from the air inlet channel. gas.
  • the motor main body 222 can be suspended and mounted on the base 51 with reference to the above in order to reduce vibration.
  • the isolation cover 555 and the base 51 are detachably connected, so that the motor main body 222 in the isolation cover 555 can be inspected and repaired.
  • the installation manner of the isolation cover 555 and the base 51 can be obtained by referring to the installation manner of the base 51 and the motor main body 222 mentioned above.
  • the isolation cover 555 may include a first section and a second section.
  • the first section of the isolation cover 555 abuts against the bottom end of the base 51 and is sleeved on the outside of the motor main body 222, and the second section of the isolation cover 555 is located The lower end of the motor main body 222 is used to cover the first section of the isolation cover 555.
  • the fan is connected to the second section of the isolation cover 555.
  • the top end of the first section of the isolation cover 555 can be provided with a positioning groove, and the bottom end of the base 51 can be connected with a positioning edge.
  • the positioning edge strip on the base 51 is correspondingly inserted into the positioning groove, so as to realize the rapid positioning and installation of the base 51 and the first section of the isolation cover 555.
  • the side of the second section of the isolation cover 555 facing the base 51 can be provided with a fan reinforcement structure.
  • the first section of the isolation cover 555 and the second section of the isolation cover 555 may be processed separately.
  • the bottom end of the first section of the isolation cover 555 and the top end of the second section of the isolation cover 555 can be positioned and installed in the manner of the above-mentioned positioning groove and the positioning edge in cooperation.
  • the second section of the isolation cover 555 may be suspended and mounted on the base 51 by fasteners.
  • the first section of the isolation cover 555 can be suspended and mounted on the base 51 by fasteners to improve the connection strength between the base 51 and the isolation cover 555; the first section of the isolation cover 555 can also only abut the bottom end of the base 51 , And rely on the pressing force between the second section of the isolation cover 555 and the base 51 to press against the base 51.
  • the third base shell 55 can be analogous to the second base shell 54, from bottom to top, it may also include a fan mounting section 551, a fan mounting section 552 and a base mounting section 553.
  • the fan installation section 551 may define the first air inlet passage 33, and the fan installation section 551 may be provided with the above-mentioned primary filter assembly, so as to perform preliminary adsorption and filtration of the gas entering the first air inlet passage 33.
  • the fan mounting section 552 may define the second air inlet channel 34, and the upper end of the fan mounting section 551 may be connected with a first guide protrusion arranged in a ring shape, and the first guide protrusion is located below the fan and is bent toward the inside of the fan , In order to guide the gas to smoothly enter the fan.
  • the base installation section 553 defines a third air inlet passage 35, and the third air inlet passage 35 is connected to the air inlet of the water tank 11.
  • the difference between the third base shell 55 and the second base shell 54 is that the fan mounting section 552 and the base mounting section 553 are separately processed.
  • An isolation seat 554 is provided between the fan installation section 552 and the base installation section 553.
  • the isolation seat 554 is sleeved and connected to the outside of the isolation sleeve.
  • the isolation seat 554, the fan mounting section 552, and the base mounting section 553 are opposite and connected to each other.
  • the fan mounting section 552 is used to support the isolation seat 554, and the fan mounting section 552 and the isolation seat 554 can be connected together by fasteners.
  • the isolation seat 554 and the base mounting section 553 can be positioned and installed in the manner of the above-mentioned positioning groove and the positioning edge in cooperation.
  • a first support piece 556 is provided between the isolation sleeve and the isolation seat 554, and the first support piece 556 can connect the isolation sleeve and the isolation seat 554 together.
  • the first supporting piece 556 may be provided with one or more.
  • the first supporting piece 556 may divide the gap between the isolating sleeve and the isolating seat 554 into several areas, so as to facilitate the passage of gas and prevent the gas entering the third air inlet passage 35. Divide equally so that it evenly enters the air inlet of the water tank 11.
  • first supporting piece 556 is arranged obliquely with respect to the axial direction of the isolation cover 555, and the inclination direction of the first supporting piece 556 is the same as the rotation direction of the fan to facilitate the passage of gas.
  • a second support piece 557 is further provided between the isolation cover 555 and the isolation seat 554, and the second support piece 557 is connected to the first support piece 556, so as to improve the connection strength between the isolation cover 555 and the isolation seat 554. From bottom to top, the second supporting piece 557 is gradually inclined away from the first supporting piece 556, so that an acute angle is formed between the first supporting piece 556 and the second supporting piece 557 to facilitate the passage and positioning of the wires.
  • a possible inlet flow path of the gas in the case where the driving source is not shared with the motor 22 is: under the action of the fan, the dust-containing gas from the outside flows from below the third base shell 55
  • the air inlet of the bearing section 551 which enters the first air inlet channel 33, can be filtered by the primary filter assembly. Then it enters the second air inlet channel 34, is guided by the fan of the second air inlet channel 34 to flow in the circumferential direction of the fan and continues to rise into the third air inlet channel 35, and enters the water tank 11 through the third channel.
  • the fan can be arranged at the lower end of the water tank 11 or at the upper end of the water tank 11.
  • the air outlet hood 41 is a member that guides the gas flowing out of the water tank 11.
  • the air outlet hood 41 is generally arranged at the upper end of the water tank 11, so the fan can be arranged in the air outlet hood 41 and not arranged in the air outlet hood 41 in two forms.
  • the form in which the fan is arranged in the air outlet hood 41 can be obtained with reference to the above.
  • the air outlet hood 41 can be arranged in at least two different ways.
  • the setting method of the air outlet hood 41 is not limited to this, and the following is only an example for description.
  • an air outlet hood 41 may be provided at the upper end of the water tank 11, and the air outlet hood 41 may be covered at the upper end of the base mounting section 543.
  • the air outlet hood 41 can cover the upper end opening of the water tank 11 and the base installation section 543. Therefore, the air outlet hood 41 located at the upper end of the base installation section 543 and the water tank 11 can be equivalent to the air inlet baffle mentioned above.
  • the air outlet hood 41 may include a first guide shell 435 and a second guide shell 436 connected to the side wall of the first guide shell 435.
  • the first guide shell 435 is sleeved on the upper end of the water tank 11 and is connected to the upper end side wall of the water tank 11. Sealed connection.
  • a seal is provided between the first guide shell 435 and the upper end of the water tank 11, and the seal includes but is not limited to a sealing gasket.
  • the second guide shell 436 extends from the first guide shell 435 toward the outside of the air outlet hood 41, and the second guide shell 436 has an opening toward the outside of the air outlet hood 41, and the opening is an air outlet of the air outlet hood 41.
  • the upper shell of the second guide shell 436 is connected with a mounting protrusion 413 arranged in a ring shape, and the mounting protrusion 413 extends downward.
  • the upper shell of the base installation section 543 is embedded in the installation protrusion 413.
  • the base mounting section 543 and the mounting protrusion 413 are connected in a sealed manner to prevent the exposure of gas.
  • the upper wall of the second guide shell 436 is gradually inclined upwards, so as to increase the wind outlet area of the second guide shell 436.
  • the air outlet of the air outlet hood 41 may include a first air outlet and a second air outlet.
  • the axis of the wind shield 41 can be symmetrically arranged.
  • Two second air outlets can be provided between the two first air outlets, and the two second air outlets can be arranged symmetrically with respect to the axis of the air outlet hood 41, so as to guide the purified air to the drawing.
  • the left, right, and back (or front) sides of the middle are examples of the middle.
  • the first guide shell 435 may be provided with a reinforcing structure, so as to improve the structural strength of the air outlet hood 41.
  • the reinforcing structure may also include reinforcing protrusions arranged in a ring shape and radial protrusions arranged along the radial direction.
  • FIG. 45 shows a schematic diagram of another water washing part, as shown in FIGS. 44-47, the air inlet of the water tank 11 and the air outlet of the water tank 11 can both be arranged on the side wall of the water tank. , And the air outlet of the water tank 11 is higher than the air inlet of the water tank 11.
  • the above-mentioned second water blocking structure 15 is provided between the air inlet of the water tank 11 and the air outlet of the water tank 11 so that the air inlet of the water tank 11 and the air outlet of the water tank 11 do not affect each other.
  • the top end of the base body 5 is located between the air inlet of the water tank 11 and the air outlet of the water tank 11, and the top end of the base body 5 is used to guide the gas in the air inlet channel into the air inlet of the water tank 11.
  • the top end of the base body 5 is the top end of the base mounting section 543, and the top end of the base mounting section 543 and the top end of the base 51 are connected to form a third air inlet channel 35.
  • the gas in the third air inlet channel 35 can be blocked from flowing in the upward direction to flow in the horizontal direction, and then enter the water tank 11 from the air inlet of the water tank 11.
  • the top of the water tank 11 is open, and the top of the water tank 11 is provided with a cover 44 for covering the open of the water tank 11, and the cover 44 is used to guide the gas in the water tank 11 to exit the water tank 11.
  • the tuyere flows.
  • the cover 44 can be provided with a guide recess 441, the guide recess 441 has an upward opening, from top to bottom, at least part of the guide recess 441 is gradually reduced in cross section, so that the gas flowing out from the middle of the water tank 11 is directed toward the water tank 11.
  • the sidewall flows.
  • the air outlet hood 41 is sleeved on the outside of the air outlet of the water tank 11, the air outlet hood 41 has an air inlet and an air outlet, and the air inlet of the air outlet hood 41 is connected to the air outlet of the water tank 11. From the air inlet of the hood 41 to the air outlet of the air outlet hood 41, at least part of the air outlet hood 41 is gradually expanded outward in the axial direction of the water tank 11, so as to increase the air output of the air outlet of the air outlet hood 41.
  • FIG. 48 shows a cross-sectional view of FIG. 44 in the middle of the air outlet hood. As shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 49 shows a three-dimensional schematic diagram of the air outlet hood and the base.
  • the air outlet hood 41 and the base 5 can be connected together by fasteners.
  • the air outlet hood 41 and the base body 5 can be connected by the above-mentioned positioning edge strip and the positioning groove in cooperation, so as to realize the positioning and assembly of the air outlet hood 41 and the base body 5.
  • the air purification device can be installed in a housing, the housing is provided with an air outlet of the housing, and the air outlet of the air purification device is hermetically connected with the air outlet of the housing.
  • a sealing ring is provided between the air outlet end of the air purification device and the inner wall of the air outlet of the housing.
  • An air conditioner internal unit comprising a shell, a heat exchange assembly and the above air purification device.
  • the shell has a heat exchange air duct and a purification air duct that are isolated.
  • the heat exchange assembly is arranged in the heat exchange air duct, and the air purification device is arranged in the purification Inside the air duct.
  • the heat exchange component and the air purification device are configured to work individually or in cooperation.
  • An air conditioner includes an external air conditioner and the above internal air conditioner.
  • a fresh air system includes a fresh air duct and a purification air duct, and the above air purification device is arranged in the purification duct.

Abstract

一种空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统;其中空气净化装置包括:水箱(11),具有进风口(111)和出风口;风扇(32),用于驱动所述水箱(11)外的空气从所述水箱(11)的进风口(111)进入所述水箱(11);水洗组件,设于所述水箱(11)内,用于使所述水箱(11)内的水清洗从所述水箱(11)的进风口(111)流向所述出风口的空气;通过设置水洗组件,含尘气体从进风口(111)进入水箱(11)内,经水洗组件净化后从水箱(11)的出风口流出,如此循环逐渐对外界气体进行净化,利于对外界空气进行加湿,更利于提高装置的净化效果。

Description

空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统 技术领域
本发明属于空气净化技术领域,具体涉及一种空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统。
背景技术
随着环境的日益恶化,空气污染的问题越来越受到人们的广泛关注,因此各种空气净化器也就应运而生。空气净化器是指能够吸附、分解或转化各种空气污染物,可有效提高空气清洁度的产品。
目前家庭中使用的空气净化器都是采用干式多层过滤吸附的方法(如静电吸附、活性炭吸附、HEPA过滤等)对空气进行净化。这类空气净化器在工作时,污染物会直接堆积在过滤装置的滤网上,长期积累的话会使滤网上的气孔堵塞,影响空气过滤效果,并且积累在滤网上的粉尘会成为细菌的繁衍体而形成二次污染。故水洗空气净化产品应运而生。
发明内容
为了解决现有技术中的上述问题,本发明提供一种空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统,包括:水箱,具有进风口和出风口;风扇,用于驱动所述水箱外的空气从所述水箱的进风口进入所述水箱;水洗组件,设于所述水箱内,用于使用所述水箱内的水清洗从所述水箱的进风口流向所述出风口的空气。
本领域技术人员能够理解的是,本发明的空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统,通过设置水洗组件,含尘气体从进风口进入水箱内,经水洗组件净化后从水箱的出风口流出,如此循环逐渐对外界气体进行净化,利于对外界空气进行加湿,更利于提高装置的净化效果。
附图说明
图1示出一种空气净化装置的立体示意图;
图2示出一种水洗部的立体示意图;
图3示出图2在A处的放大图;
图4示出了一种用于形成水幕的水洗组件的示意图;
图5示出了一种筒体和动力部的剖视图;
图6示出一种水箱和第一挡水结构的立体示意图;
图7示出一种第一挡水结构的横向立体剖视图;
图8示出另一种第一挡水结构的横向立体剖视图;
图9示出一种水箱和第一挡水结构的立体剖视图;
图10示出了图9在B处的放大图;
图11示出另一种第一挡水结构、水箱以及出风罩配合的部分纵向立体剖视图;
图12示出图11在C处的放大图;
图13示出再一种第一挡水结构和水箱配合的部分纵向立体剖视图;
图14示出图13在D处的放大图;
图15示出图13在E处的放大图;
图16示出一种基体的立体示意图;
图17示出一种初级过滤组件的立体示意图;
图18示出一种水箱以及底板的俯视图;
图19示出一种底座和水箱的立体示意图;
图20示出了一种水箱和其内部的缺水提示组件的横向立体剖视图;
图21示出一种缺水提示组件的立体示意图;
图22示出一种溢水处理结构、水箱以及基体配合的立体示意图;
图23示出与溢水处理结构对应的基座的部分立体示意图;
图24示出一种安装盒的示意图;
图25示出一种空气净化装置的俯视图;
图26示出图25在M-M处的部分立体剖视图;
图27示出部分水箱和下罩体连接位置的示意图;
图28示出图1在第一出风孔的中间位置的横向剖视图;
图29示出图25在N-N处的部分剖视图;
图30示出部分上罩体的立体示意图;
图31示出图26在F的放大图;
图32为另一种空气净化装置的立体示意图;
图33示出一种空气净化装置的动力部的部分剖视图;
图34示出一种空气净化装置的爆炸图;
图35示出图32的纵向的立体剖视图;
图36示出图35在I处的放大图;
图37示出第二基壳的部分横向立体剖视图;
图38示出第二基壳在固定环部分的纵向剖视图;
图39示出一种承载段以及其上初级过滤组件的部分横向立体剖视图;
图40示出图39在G处的放大图;
图41示出一种承载段和初级过滤组件的部分立体示意图;
图42示出图41在H处的放大图;
图43示出一种基体的俯视图;
图44示出又一种空气净化装置的立体示意图;
图45示出另一种水洗部的示意图;
图46示出图44的部分爆炸示意图;
图47示出图44的纵向立体示意图;
图48示出图44出风罩的中间位置的横向剖视图;
图49示出一种出风罩和基体的立体示意图。
具体实施方式
首先,本领域技术人员应当理解的是,这些实施方式仅仅用于解释本发明的技术原理,并非旨在限制本发明的保护范围。本领域技术人员可以根据需要对其作出调整,以便适应具体的应用场合。例如,虽然本发明的空气净化装置是结合空调设备来描述的,但是这并不是限定的,其他具有水洗空气使用需求的设备均可配置本发明的空气净化装置。
图1示出一种空气净化装置的立体示意图,参照图1所示,本发明的空气净化装置根据风的流向可包括进风部3、水洗部1以及出风部4。水洗部1包括水箱11以及在水箱11内设置的水洗组件,该水洗组件在动力部2提供的动力下将水箱11内的水形成水幕,含尘气体由进风部3进入水洗部1后,可穿过水洗组件形成的水幕,使得含尘气体中的灰尘、细菌病毒等 溶于水或被水幕中的水分子、负离子去除,从而完成含尘气体的水洗净化,经水洗部1水洗净化后的干净气体从出风部4,以提高周围的空气质量。
在图1中,空气净化装置还设置有用于承载水箱11的基体5,进风部3和动力部2可依托于基体5设置,以便实现模块化、集成化设置。换句话说,进风部3可以与基体5通过模塑成型的方式形成为一体件,例如,一体件的侧壁或底壁作为进风部3,一体件的底壁则用于安装动力部2并用于支撑水箱11。
水箱11具有与进风部3连通的进风口以及与出风部4连通的出风口。示例性地,出风部4可包括出风罩41,出风罩41可罩设于水箱11的出风口,被净化后的气体从水箱11的出风口进入出风罩41,从而通过出风罩41可以将净化后的气体引导向任意需要的方向。例如,图1中示出了通过出风罩41将从水箱11出风口排出的净化风引向了图1中的左侧、右侧以及后侧。
下文分别对空气净化装置的各个部分进行详细的描述。
下面首先对水箱11进行描述。
图2示出一种水洗部的立体示意图;如图2所示,水箱11可由透明材料制成,例如可以是透明塑料通过模塑的方式制作而成。水箱11可以容纳用于清洗空气洗涤液,该洗涤液可以是清水,但并不限于清水,例如,也可以是掺有消毒剂的水。为了简化描述,下文以水为例进行描述,但这不应视为对保护范围的具体限制。
如图2所示,水箱11的上部用于气体流动,水箱11的下部用于盛放水。水箱11的进风口111可设置于水箱11的上部侧壁,在进风口111的外侧可以如下文所述的设有初级过滤组件,在进风口的内侧可以如下文所述的设有第一挡水结构,而且在第一挡水结构的内侧还能够可选地设置加湿过滤组件。
继续如图2所示,水箱11的顶端可以呈开口设置以作为出风口,进入水箱11内部的气体可从水箱11的顶端开口处流出。在出风口处可以如下文所述的设有第二挡水结构15。
需要指出的是,进风口111和出风口的位置也可设置成不同于图2示出的那样。例如,进风口111和出风口的位置可以对调,或者在一些示例中,还可以将进风口111和出风口都设置在水箱11相对的侧壁上。下文以进风口111设置在水箱的侧壁上为例进行描述本方案的空气净化装置,对于出风口其他的设置方式,本领域技术人员可参考下文得出,在此就不再赘述。
继续参考图2,进风口111的数量可以为多个,但也可以仅设置一个,每个进风口111的形状、尺寸可以根据实际需要进行设置。如图2所示,当进风口111为多个时,这些进风口111可沿水箱11的侧壁的周向均布,以便均分气体,使得进入水箱11内的气体分布均匀。
值得说明的是,当进风口设置在水箱11的侧壁上,而出风口位于水箱11的顶部时,该进风口的上端面应该低于水洗组件所形成的水幕所在的平面,以便从进风口进入水箱11的含尘空气只有经过水幕的清洗之后才可以从水箱11的出风口流出。需要指出的是,由于水会受到重力的影响,故此处的水幕所在的平面为泛指,原则上进风口的上端面应该位于水幕与侧壁的交线以下。
由上可知,水箱11的下部用于盛放水,故水箱的下部侧壁可设置刻度线,以便用户对水箱11的液位情况进行观测和掌控。容易理解,水箱11也可以仅仅在设置刻度线的部分由透明材料制成,而其余部分由非透明材料制成,以便用户能够通过透明部分的刻度线观察水箱11内的水位。参考图2所示,刻度线可包括最低液位线,可用“0”示出;也可包括最高液位线,可用“max”示出。可以理解地,标有“max”的刻度线位于进风口的下方。
可选地,水箱11上可设有如下文所述的缺水提示组件18或者满水提示组件,以便对水箱11内的水位进行监测和预警;水箱11上还可设有如下文提到的加水结构,以便在不取下水箱11的情况下对水箱进行加水;水箱11也可设有如下文提到的溢水处理结构,以便在加水过多时,对多余的水进行排放。
为了更快理解本方案的发明内容,下面先对水洗组件进行描述。其中,水洗组件的结构,包括但不限于如下几种可能的实现方式:
在其中一种可能的实现方式中,图4示出了一种用于形成水幕的水洗组件的示意图,如图4所示,水洗组件可将水箱11中所储存的水向上扬起,并将水朝向水箱11的内壁方向进行喷射。具体地,水洗组件可包括呈空心设置的筒体12,筒体12的下端和水箱11的下端连通。示例性地,筒体12的下端呈开口设置。筒体12的下端开口与水箱11的底壁之间具有间隙,以便水箱11中的水从该间隙进入筒体12的内部。动力部2可使筒体12绕其自身轴线转动,以便进入筒体12内的水在旋转力的作用下沿筒体12内壁逐渐向上移动。在筒体12靠近顶端的侧壁沿着周向设有多个甩水孔121,这些甩水孔121高于水箱11所容纳的洗涤液的最高液面,以便从筒体12内壁扬起的水从甩水孔121被甩出,并以一定的初速度(初速度为甩水孔121位置的线速度)做远离筒体12,并逐渐靠近水箱11的内壁的运动,从而形成以水幕,以便对从进风口进入的气体进行清洗。需要指出的是,多个甩水孔121可沿着筒体12的周向均匀或者非均匀的排列成一圈,而且在某些示例中,还可以沿着筒体12的轴线设置多圈甩水孔121,以提高水洗净化的效果。
在另一种可实现方式中,水洗组件包括有水管,水管可包括第一端和第二端,水管的第一端可伸到水箱储存的水中,以便吸入水箱下端的水;水管的第二端可延伸到水箱的上端。水管上可设有水泵,水泵可使水箱中的水从第一端流动到第二端。水洗组件还包括可转动的盘状部件,从水管第二端流下的水落到转动的盘状部件上后,可在离心力的作用下被甩出,从而形成水幕。
在又一种可能的实现方式中,也可使用呈空心设置的旋转体来替换可转动的盘状部件,旋转体的上端可呈开口设置,并在旋转体的侧壁设有若干通孔。从水管的第二端流出的水,可从旋转体的上端开口进入旋转体的内部,并沿旋转体的切向从通孔被甩出,从而形成水幕。
在再一些可能的实现方式中,也可以采用转动水帘、沿着长度方向设置有多个出水口的水管,相对设置的两个喷头结构、雾化器等方式在水箱内形成水幕、水帘、水雾等,使得进入水箱中的空气可以被水洗净化。
综上所述,用于使水箱11中的水形成水幕的水洗组件有多种,下文以水洗组件包括筒体12,动力部2带动筒体12转动为例来介绍本申请的方案。其它水洗组件结构可参考本申请得出,在此就不再赘述。
继续参考图4,筒体12的侧壁可从上到下逐渐朝向远离筒体12的轴线方向倾斜,也即是说,筒体12被设置成大致锥形的形状,锥形的小径端位于下方,锥形的大径端位于上方,以利于水沿着筒体12的内壁往上爬升。
继续参考图4,筒体12可以分成上段122以及连接在上段122的下端的下段123,甩水孔121可设于上段122。上下两段可通过诸如注塑之类的一体成型方式制作成一体件,以利于筒体12的结构的稳定性。当然,筒体12的上下两段也可以为分体件,二者再通过螺接、旋接或者熔接等方式装配在一起,而且上段122的下端与下段123的上端可相互套设在一起,例如下段123的上端可伸进上段122的下端内,以便增强上段122和下段123之间的密封性。
需要指出的是,当上段122下端的口径大于下段123的上端的口径时,在上段122和下段123的连接处可通过一台阶部进行连接。通过在上下两段之间形成台阶部,可以为水在筒体12内壁爬升提供暂存区域,有利于提高从甩水孔121甩出的水量。
可选地,图5示出了一种筒体和动力部的剖视图,以便体现上段122和下段123之间的连接,上段122可包括上筒体以及内凸缘,内凸缘可包括径向段与轴向段,径向段可抵接于下文提到的外凸缘的上端面,轴向段可相对于径向段向下弯折。
下段123可内嵌于凸缘内。示例性地,下段123可包括下筒体以及外凸缘,外凸缘可套设于下筒体的上端的外侧,且外凸缘的一端可高于下筒体的上端。内凸缘的轴向段抵接于下筒体的顶端,内凸缘的径向段抵接于外凸缘,如此,轴向段远离径向段的一侧可与下筒体位于同一曲面上。如此为液滴提供平缓的爬升曲面。另外,外凸缘和内凸缘相互配合,且相互遮挡缝隙,可便于提高上段122和下段123之间的密封性。下筒体外凸缘外凸缘下筒体外凸缘下筒体外凸缘下筒体下筒体上筒体内凸缘内凸缘径向段轴向段径向段外凸缘轴向段轴向段径向段下筒体外凸缘内凸缘
值得说明的是,为了实现上段122和下段123之间的密封性,还可通过在下段123和上段122之间设置密封件的方式。密封件包括但不限于密封圈、密封垫等。
可选地,下段123的侧壁和筒体12的轴线之间的夹角可大于上段122的侧壁和筒体12的侧壁之间的夹角。水在下段123中快速上升,水在上段122中,可便于脱离上段122的内壁对其的支撑力或者粘附力,更便于从甩水孔121被甩出。另外,上段122的倾斜角度的变化也可从进风口的开口大小进行考虑。可以理解地,从甩水孔121被甩出的水离开上段122的初速 度的方向可跟上段122的截面有关,而初速度的方向影响了被甩出的水的运动轨迹,进而影响了被甩出的水和气体的接触面积,通过合理设置甩水孔121在筒体12上的位置、筒体12的转动速度、甩水孔121所在位置筒体12的横截面中的一个或者多个,可以提高水洗组件形成的水幕的质量,从而提高空气的净化效果。
如图5所示,筒体12的上端可呈开口设置,在筒体12的上端可设有上盖13,上盖13可用于封闭筒体12的上端开口。此外,筒体12内的水在随筒体12转动而上升到筒体12的上端面时,水可被上端面阻挡而下落,使得被上端面阻挡的至少部分水从甩水孔121流出,以便增加甩水孔121的出水量。
可选地,上盖13可包括底壁和侧壁,上盖13的底壁可与筒体12的上端面抵接,上盖13的侧壁可套设于筒体12的外侧。上盖13的侧壁的下端面位于甩水孔121的上方,以便阻挡至少部分具有朝上运动趋势的水。可以理解地,至少部分被从甩水孔121甩出的水的初速度具有朝上运动的趋势,这部分的水的运动轨迹可能在气体的动范围的上方,该部分水可能不会与气体进行接触,通过适当在上盖13的侧壁上设置往远离筒体12方向延伸的翻边,可以提高拦截从甩水孔121甩出并往水箱11顶部运动的水的能力。被拦截的水可落到上盖13的侧壁的下方的上段122的外侧壁上,并可随着上段122的转动而在离心力的作用下向水箱11的内侧壁方向被甩出,以形成水幕,从而可以提高空气的净化效果。
可替换地,筒体12和上盖13可通过注塑等一体成型的方式形成为一体件,此时,可在甩水孔121的上方设置上挡水凸起,该上挡水凸起从筒体12的外侧壁朝向背离筒体12的方向延伸,以便阻挡至少部分具有朝向水箱11顶端运动趋势的水。
可替换地,筒体12的上端呈开口设置。筒体12的甩水孔121由其顶端的开口充当,而在其侧壁上可设置或者不设置甩水孔121。当筒体12被驱动旋转时,被吸入到筒体12内的水顺着其侧壁往上爬升,全部或者部分爬升上来的水可从筒体12的顶端开口处被甩出并形成水幕。
可选地,如图4和图5所示,在甩水孔121的下方还可以设置下挡水凸起14,下挡水凸起14从筒体12的外侧壁朝向背离筒体12的方向延伸,以便阻挡从甩水孔121喷出的朝向水箱11底部运动的水。可以理解地,至少部分被从甩水孔121甩出的水的初速度具有朝向水箱11底部运动的趋势,一方面,这部分的水的运动轨迹可能在从进风口进入水箱11内的气体的运动范围之外,该部分水可能不会与气体进行接触,通过设置下挡水凸起14,可以拦截一部分向水箱11底部运动的水,被拦截的水可在下挡水凸起14的上方积聚,并随着筒体12的转动而在离心力的作用下被甩出,以形成水幕,从而有利于提高空气的净化效果;另一方面,这部分水容易从水箱11侧壁的进风口落到水箱11外部,通过设置下挡水凸起14,可以一定程度上避免水从进风口溅出水箱11。
如图2所示,在水箱11的出风口处设置有用于遮挡住水箱11的出风口的第二挡水结构15,,通过设置第二挡水结构15可以阻挡从甩水孔121甩出的水,使其不会从水箱11的出风口溅到水箱11的外部。需要指出的是,第二挡水结构15阻挡的水可以包括直接由甩水孔121甩出的水,也可以包括穿过水幕的气体所携带的水。
示例性地,图3是图2在A处的放大图,如图3所示,第二挡水结构15包括吸水件151,吸水件151可选用能够阻挡水滴通过但允许气体可通过的材料,例如现有技术中的多孔高分子材料。另外,结合下文提到的加水结构19可知,由于从加水结构19加入的水需要穿过第二挡水结构15,故在某些示例中,吸水件151需要采用单方向阻水的材料,例如,可以是网状聚氨酯泡沫塑料、海绵等。
此外,为了便于安装和支撑吸水件151,避免吸水件151在吸水后出现过度下坠的现象,第二挡水结构15还可包括支撑架,支撑架可呈空心的柱状设置,吸水件151可安装于支撑架内部。支撑架可以通过螺接、卡扣连接等合适的方式安装在水箱11的顶端。例如,可以在水箱11的顶端设置放置凹槽112,支撑架可内嵌于放置凹槽112内。示例性地,放置凹槽112的底壁可用于支撑支撑架的底壁,支撑架的侧壁可与放置凹槽112的侧壁过盈配合,以便从周向上限制支撑架的位移。
支撑架也可以被设置成网状结构,该网状结构的支撑架可以与上述空心柱状的支撑架采用相同的方式安装于水箱11的顶端。通过将支撑架设置成网状结构,不仅可以提高支撑架对吸水件151的支撑力,而且也不会影响被净化后的气体的通过。可选地,网状结构的网眼可为六边形,以便提高支撑架的稳定性。
可选地,支撑架可包括第一支撑网152和第二支撑网153,第一支撑网152可包括底壁和侧壁,第一支撑网152的侧壁可连接于第一支撑网152的底壁的外周,且朝向上方延伸。第二支撑网153可包括顶壁和侧壁,第二支撑网153的侧壁可连接于第二支撑网153的顶壁的外周,且朝向下方延伸。第一支撑网152的侧壁可套设于第二支撑网153的侧壁的外侧。吸水件151可位于第一支撑网152的底壁、第二支撑网153的侧壁以及第二支撑网153的顶壁合围成的收容空间内,以便吸水件151的下方被第一支撑网152支撑,吸水件151的上端被第二支撑网153覆盖以便限定吸水件151的上方,吸水件151的周向被第二支撑网153的侧壁和第一支撑网152的侧壁限定,以便维持吸水件151的结构形状和便于吸水件151的安装。
另外,第一支撑网152和/或第二支撑网153可具有一定的弹性,以便提高第一支撑网152的侧壁和第二支撑网153的侧壁之间的密封性能,以便阻挡水从第一支撑网152的侧壁及第二支撑网153的侧壁间溅出到水箱11外。此外,两者之间还可通过设置密封件的方式来提高密封性能,或者也可通过第二支撑网153与第一支撑网152的过盈配合来实现。
继续参考图3,当第二支撑网153和第一支撑网152过盈配合时,第二支撑网153的顶壁的外周可设有安装凹槽,第一支撑网152的侧壁的上端可连接有安装凸起,安装凸起可配合连接于安装凹槽。示例性地,安装凸起可朝向第一支撑网152的轴线方向,安装凸起的下端面可抵接于安装凹槽的底壁安装,以便阻挡第二支撑网153的上端的移动。可选地,安装凹槽的数量可为一个或多个,多个安装凹槽可均布于第二支撑网153的外周设置。
图6示出一种水箱11和第一挡水结构16的立体示意图,如图6所示,水箱11的进风口处还可设置有第一挡水结构16,用于阻挡水从进风口溅出到水箱11的外部。第一挡水结构16可位于水箱11内且能够遮挡住进风口,例如,第一挡水结构16可连接于水箱11的内壁并位于筒体12和水箱11的内壁之间。应当理解,设置在进风口处的第一挡水结构16不能阻挡水箱11外的空气正常从进风口处进入水箱11内。下文简要介绍几种第一挡水结构16的实现方式,但这并非是对于第一挡水结构16的具体限制:
在其中一种可能的实现方式中,图7为一种第一挡水结构16的横向部分立体剖视图,图8为另一种第一挡水结构16的横向立体剖视图,如图6-图8所示,第一挡水结构16可包括至少两个挡水叶片161,相邻两个挡水叶片161之间具有间距,在垂直于水箱11的轴向的截面上,挡水叶片161朝向水箱11的轴向方向的一端与挡水叶片161远离水箱11的轴向的一端位于截面的不同径向方向上。
为便于描述,不妨以水箱11的轴线方向作为挡水叶片161的高度方向,水箱11的周线方向作为挡水叶片161的宽度方向。水箱11的横截面为,采用平行于水箱11的上端面的平面去截挡水叶片161而得到的截面,该截面的长度方向即为挡水叶片161的长度方向。
可以理解地,从水箱11的轴线到水箱11的边缘,至少部分挡水叶片161的横截面可朝向一侧倾斜,以便从水箱11的外侧朝向水箱11内看,挡水叶片161远离筒体12的一端能够遮挡挡水叶片161靠近筒体12的一端,提高水滴碰到挡水叶片161的侧壁的几率,以便拦截飞散的水滴,阻挡水滴从进风口飞出。
另外,相邻两个挡水叶片161可朝向相同的方向倾斜(图6-图8中以两个挡水叶片161的倾斜方向相同为例示出),也可朝向不同的方向倾斜。需要指出的是,挡水叶片161的倾斜方向指的是挡水叶片161远离水箱11的轴线的一端相对于挡水叶片161靠近水箱11的轴线一端的位置方向。当两个挡水叶片161的倾斜方向相同时,两个挡水叶片161之间的间距相对较大,便于空气流通,且结构相对简单,利于设计和加工;当两个挡水叶片161的倾斜方向不同时,两个挡水叶片161之间的间距相对较小,有利于阻挡水滴通过,可以提高挡水效果。
综上所述,第一挡水结构16通过设置至少两个挡水叶片161,且相邻两个挡水叶片161之间具有间距,并且挡水叶片161的至少部分从水箱11的轴线到水箱11的边缘逐渐朝向一侧倾斜,使得从水箱11进风口进来的空气,穿过两个挡水叶片161之间的间隙进入水箱11内,然后与穿过水幕组件形成的水幕,从而得到净化。此外,朝向一侧倾斜的挡水叶片161可以阻挡水滴从相邻两个挡水叶片161之间的间隙中通过,进而使得水滴不会溅出到水箱11的外部,有利于避免影响其他部件,也利于降低水箱11中水的浪费。
可选地,挡水叶片161的倾斜方向可与筒体12的转动方向相反,以提高挡水叶片161的挡水效果。例如,如图7和图8所示,当筒体12被配置成沿逆时针甩水时,挡水叶片161的倾斜方向可以沿顺时针方向。
可选地,靠近水箱11的轴线的一端的相邻两个挡水叶片161之间的距离,可大于远离水箱11的轴线的一端的相邻两个 挡水叶片161之间的距离。也就是说,挡水叶片161可包括第一端和第二端,第一端靠近水箱11的轴线,第二端远离水箱11的轴线。相邻两个挡水叶片161的第一端之间的距离可大于这两个挡水叶片161第二端之间的距离,以便更好地拦截水滴,避免水滴溅落到水箱11的外部。
值得说明的是,一个挡水叶片161的宽度,也即挡水叶片161沿水箱11周向的投影长度,可等于或大于相邻两个挡水叶片161的第一端之间的距离。也就是说,一个挡水叶片161的第二端能够遮挡下一个挡水叶片161的第一端,也即位于上游的挡水叶片161的第二端可以遮挡位于下游的挡水叶片161的第一端,此处的下游挡水叶片161指的是,沿着挡水叶片161倾斜方向作为指示方向,当前挡水叶片161沿着该指示方向的下游的第一个挡水叶片161即为下游挡水叶片161(沿着挡水叶片161倾斜的方向,前方为上游,后方为下游)。具体地,如图中的第一挡水叶片1611和第二挡水叶片1612,第二挡水叶片1612为第一挡水叶片1611的下游挡水叶片161,从水箱11的外侧向水箱11内看,第二挡水叶片1612的第一端被第一挡水叶片1611的第二端遮挡。
以下介绍几种可以实现上游挡水叶片161的第二端遮挡下游挡水叶片161的第一端的方式,但这些实现方式并非是限制性的:
在一种可能的实现方式中,如图7-图8中,挡水叶片161上连接有拦截片,拦截片朝向相邻的挡水叶片161延伸。拦截片可包括第一拦截片163,第一拦截片163朝向下游的挡水叶片延伸。挡水叶片161靠近水箱11的轴线的一端为挡水叶片161的第一端,第一拦截片163远离挡水叶片161的一端为挡水叶片161的第二端。如此,通过设置第一拦截片163的方式来遮挡下一个挡水叶片161的第一端,不仅提高拦截效率,而且能够减小挡水叶片161的长度,使得整体结构更加紧凑。
在另一种可能的实现方式中,可不设置拦截片,挡水叶片161的宽度可足够宽,以便其宽度能够遮挡下一个挡水叶片161的第一端。如此设置,可使挡水叶片161的结构简单,易于加工。
如图6和图7所示,第一挡水结构16还可包括挡圈162,挡圈162位于相邻的两个挡水叶片161之间,且甩水孔121的投影位于挡圈162内,以便拦截从甩水孔121甩出的水滴。另外,挡圈162还能够将若干挡水叶片161连接在一起,从而可以加强相邻两个挡水叶片161之间的连接,提高第一挡水结构16的稳定性和结构强度。值得说明的是,在挡水叶片161的高度方向上,挡圈162的上下端面与挡水叶片161的上下端面之间具有一定间距,也就是说,挡圈162连接于若干挡水叶片161的大致中间的位置。当然,在某些示例中,挡圈162可设置在挡水叶片161的中间靠上位置,以便减少挡圈162对于水箱11进风的阻碍。
可选地,如图8所示,上述挡圈162可以由设置在相邻两个挡水叶片161之间的第二拦截片166替代。示例性地,第二拦截片166从下游的挡水叶片161朝向位于上游的挡水叶片161延伸。在相邻的两个挡水叶片161上,分列于不同的挡水叶片161的第二拦截片166和第一拦截片163,在进风口上的投影具有重叠部分。也就是说,位于下游的挡水叶片161上的第二拦截片166远离挡水叶片161的一端可遮挡,位于上游的挡水叶片161上的第一拦截片163远离挡水叶片161的一端,使得上游的挡水叶片161和下游的挡水叶片161之间的第二拦截片166和第一拦截片163之间具有重叠的部分,便于拦截往进风口位置飞溅的水滴。示例性地,一个挡水叶片161厚度方向的两侧可分别连接有第二拦截片166和第一拦截片163。
此外,挡水叶片161至少连接有两个第二拦截片166;至少一个连接于上游的挡水叶片161的第一拦截片163,位于连接于下游的挡水叶片161的两个第二拦截片166之间。
挡水叶片166至少连接有两个第一拦截片163;至少一个连接于下游的挡水叶片的第二拦截片166,位于连接于上游的挡水叶片161的两个第一拦截片163之间。如此,能够提高气体在相邻两个挡水叶片161之间行进的路程,进而增加气体和被甩出的液滴之间的接触面积。另外,上、下游的拦截片相互遮挡,能够有效阻挡被甩出的液滴。
示例性地,挡水叶片上可连接有至少两个第二拦截片166和至少两个第一拦截片163。图8以一个挡水叶片161上有两个第一拦截叶片163和两个第一拦截片163为例示出。其中,挡水叶片161的第二端可连接有第一拦截片163,以便遮挡下游的挡水叶片161的第一端;挡水叶片161的第一端可连接有第二拦截片166,以便增加气体在相邻两个挡水叶片161之间行进的路程,进而增加气体和被甩出的液滴之间的接触面积。另外,第二拦截片166也可与下游的挡水叶片161的第一拦截片163之间相互遮挡,进而阻挡被甩出的液滴。
另外,挡水叶片的中部也可连接有第二拦截片166和第一拦截片163,且位于挡水叶片161中部的第一拦截片163比第二拦截片166更靠近挡水叶片161的第二端设置。
其中,多个连接于挡水叶片161的第一端的第二拦截片166可位于同一圆周上,从而可以与甩水孔121甩出的水的轨迹相对应,以提高挡水效果。
可选地,如图6-图8所示,在水箱11的轴线方向上,挡水叶片161的两端可超出进风口的两端,也即挡水叶片161的上端从进风口的上端面往上延伸一部分,挡水叶片161的下端从进风口的下端面往下延伸一部分,换句话说,在水箱11的轴线方向上,挡水叶片161的两端之间的长度可大于进风口的两端之间的长度。可以理解地,被挡水叶片161或者挡圈162或者第二拦截片166或者第一拦截片163拦截的水滴,会顺着挡水叶片161的表面或者挡圈162或者第一拦截片163或者第二拦截片166向下流到水箱11底部。应当理解,挡水叶片161的下方需要低于水箱11的进风口,以防止水流到水箱11的外部;而且,由于挡水叶片161会部分遮挡水箱11的进风口以拦截向水箱11的进风口处飞溅的水滴,相邻两个挡水叶片161之间或者挡水叶片161与进风口的内壁之间需要具有间隙。
可选地,挡水叶片161的下端超出进风口的部分可具有斜面1613,该斜面1613从水箱11边缘处往水箱11的轴线方向倾斜向下设置,使得从水箱11的进风口进入的空气在该斜面1613的引导下,向水箱11的底部运动,从而可以与水箱11底部的水先接触,从而可以通过这种面接触得到相应的净化。
可选地,如图6-图8所示,挡水叶片161呈倾斜设置的部分可具有一定弧度。也就是说,从进风口进入的空气要先经过两个相邻挡水叶片161之间的间距,再进入水箱11中。两个相邻挡水叶片161之间的间隙对空气有引导作用,故设置成弧度以方便空气流过,减小挡水叶片161对空气的阻力。
图9示出一种水箱11和第一挡水结构16的立体剖视图,图10示出了图9在D处的放大图,如图6、图9以及图10所示,第一挡水结构16还可包括安装盖164,挡水叶片161的上端连接于安装盖164,安装盖164和水箱11的内侧壁可拆卸连接。通过设置安装盖164可以将所有挡水叶片161的顶端连接在一起,以便增加第一挡水结构16的整体结构强度。另外,通过安装盖164将多个挡水叶片161组装成一体,可以便于第一挡水结构16的装配。
下文介绍安装盖164和水箱11内侧壁的几种可选的连接方式,但不限于下述的这些实现方式:
可选地,如图9和图10所示,水箱11的内壁设有限位凹槽113,限位凹槽113的周向横跨进风口的一部分,安装盖164连接有限位凸缘1642,限位凸缘1642配合连接于限位凹槽113。示例性地,限位凹槽113包括底壁以及两个侧壁,限位凸缘1642可从上到下插入限位凹槽113中,限位凸缘1642的一面与限位凹槽113靠近水洗部1的一侧壁抵接。另外,安装盖164远离水洗部1一侧的边缘可抵接于水箱11的内壁(限位凹槽113的另一侧壁)。基于上述,可以限制安装盖164沿水箱11横向方向的位移。
如图6所示,水箱11的侧壁可包括弧形部分和竖直部分,进风口可开在水箱11的弧形部分上。可以理解地,由于筒体12转动,其上设置的甩水孔121也跟随筒体12做周向运动,通过设置弧形部分,可以使得从甩水孔121喷射出的水与更多的空气接触。如图9和图10所示,限位凹槽113可设置在弧形部分上,限位凸缘1642相应地设置成形状相配合的弧形,如此,安装盖164可以在周向被限制移动。
通过采用上述限位凸缘1642和限位凹槽113配合的结构,不仅不需要紧固件,而且安装方便快捷。当然,水箱11和安装盖164也可通过紧固件进行固定,其中,紧固件包括但不限于螺栓、螺钉、固定销等。
继续参见图6,安装盖164的上端面还可以设置导流槽1641,导流槽1641和水箱11内部连通,以便落于安装盖164顶端水可在导流槽1641的作用下,重新流回水箱11的底部。此外,图3示出图2在A处的放大图,如图2、图3以及图6所示,水箱11的内壁也可设有引导槽117,引导槽117可沿水箱11的竖直方向延伸,以便在被甩出的水落到安装盖164和水箱11内壁之间的间隙时,水可顺着引导槽117流到水箱11的底部。
可选地,如图7和图8所示,第一挡水结构16还包括加强凸缘165,挡水叶片161的下端与加强凸缘165连接,以便加强各个挡水叶片161之间的连接强度,提高当水结构的强度和稳定性。其中,加强凸缘165上设置有加强肋1651,加强肋1651 朝向水箱11的轴线方向延伸。加强肋1651可设置在加强凸缘165的下端,以利于被挡水叶片161、挡圈162拦截的水滴的收集。
继续参考图7和图8,第一挡水结构16还可包括立壁1643,立壁1643可从安装盖164的位置向水箱11的底部方向延伸并可与加强凸缘165相交,以便加强第一挡水结构16的强度。立壁1643的一侧可与其相邻的挡水叶片161固定,以便提到结构的整体性。
在另一种可能的实现方式中,图11示出另一种第一挡水结构16、水箱11以及出风罩配合的部分纵向立体剖视图(为了方便示出甩水孔121,图11中筒体12未被剖开),如图11所示,第一挡水结构16可包括遮挡板167和连接板168,连接板168可相对遮挡板167呈弯折设置,遮挡板167可用于遮挡进风口,连接板168可连接于水箱11的侧壁,且朝向水箱11的轴线方向延伸,遮挡板167可连接于连接板168远离水箱11的侧壁的一端,以便遮挡板167和水箱11的侧壁之间具有一定间隙,使得从进风口进来的气体可先向下绕过遮挡板167的下端,再与水幕接触。
另外,连接板168和水箱11的侧壁的连接方式可参考上一种方式的安装盖164和水箱11的侧壁之间的连接方式。可选地,遮挡板167背离连接板168的一侧的下端可连接有拦水凸起169,拦水凸起169可包括底壁和侧壁,拦水凸起169的底壁可连接于遮挡板167的下端且朝向水箱11的轴线方向延伸,拦水凸起169的侧壁可相对拦水凸起169的底壁朝向上方弯折。遮挡板167、拦水凸起169的底壁以及拦水凸起169的侧壁可合围成容纳腔523,该容纳腔523用于收集第一挡水结构16阻挡的水滴。具体而言,撞击到遮挡板167的水滴可以顺着遮挡板167流到容纳腔523中,并可在容纳腔523中积聚。
可选地,拦水凸起169的底壁和侧壁中的至少一个可设有若干通孔,上述积聚在容纳腔523中的水可从通孔穿过,以便回流到水箱11的底部。
在又一种可能的实现方式中,图13示出再一种第一挡水结构16和水箱11配合的部分纵向立体剖视图(为了方便示出甩水孔121,图13中筒体12未被剖开),图14示出图13在D处的放大图,图15示出图13在E处的放大图,如图13-图15所示第一挡水结构16可包括加湿过滤件171以及安装壳,安装壳可用于安装加湿过滤件171,且可使加湿过滤件171维持一定湿度。示例性地,安装壳包括外壳172和内壳173,加湿过滤件171位于外壳172和内壳173之间,外壳172和内壳173可将加湿过滤件171夹紧,以便对加湿过滤件171进行限位和支撑。其中,内壳173可包括上导板以及内支架。上导板可连接于水箱11的侧壁,且可朝向水箱11的轴线方向延伸。内支架可从上导板的位置往水箱11底部的方向延伸,内壳173用于限制加湿过滤件171的上端和内侧。外壳172可包括下支撑板以及外支架。下支撑板可位于上导板的下方,且可连接于上导板。下支撑板可朝向水箱11的轴线方向延伸,且外支架可从支撑板的位置往水箱11底部的方向延伸,外壳172用于限制加湿过滤件171的下端和外侧。内支架和外支架可设置成框架式结构,以利于气体穿过。
可选地,筒体12上设置的甩水孔121可高于上导板,在上导板上设置有进水孔111,进水孔111可正对加湿过滤件171,以便为加湿过滤件171提供水。可以理解地,从甩水孔121被甩出的水滴可在与上导板上方的部分侧壁接触后,落到上导板上,并经过上导板上的进水孔111进入加湿过滤件171中,以便侵湿加湿过滤件171。
可选地,从水箱11的外周到水箱11的轴线方向,上导板可逐渐朝下倾斜,进水孔111可设于上导板的下端。
可选地,加湿过滤件171可包括第一径向段和轴向段,加湿过滤件171的第一径向段位于上导板和下支撑板之间,加湿过滤件171的轴向段位于内支架和外支架之间。通过呈倾斜设置的上导板,可将上导板上的水引导到加湿过滤件171的轴向段,使得轴向段被充分润湿,以利于该轴向段对从水箱11侧壁的进风口进入的含尘空气进行加湿和过滤。
可选地,内壳173还包括上压板,上压板可从内支架的位置朝向水箱11的轴线方向延伸;外壳172还包括下盖板,下盖板从外支架的位置朝向水箱11的轴线方向延伸;上压板和下盖板可限制加湿过滤件171的下端,以便锁住加湿过滤件171的水分,防止其流失。示例性地,加湿过滤件171还可包括第二径向段,第二径向段可位于上压板和下盖板之间。
可选地,内壳173还可包括内挡水板,内挡水板包括与上压板相对设置的底部以及从底部往上延伸的侧部,内挡水板的侧部包覆上压板的至少部分内侧面。内挡水板可与加湿过滤件171的底端抵接,以便阻挡加湿过滤件171底端的水分流失。外壳172还可包括外挡水板,外挡水板包括与下盖板相对设置的底部以及从底部往上延伸的侧部,外挡水板的侧部包覆下盖板的至少部分内侧面。外挡水板的外侧面可覆盖内挡水板的至少部分外侧面,从而内挡水板和外挡水板可以相互遮挡各自的缝隙,以便减小加湿过滤件171上的水分的流失。
可选地,上导板的下端可连接有挡板,下支撑板的外侧面与挡板紧固连接,以便实现内壳173的安装。可选地,下支撑板的顶面具有与上导板的底面相匹配的形状,以提高二者的接触面积,进而提高两者之间的连接。
可选地,加湿过滤件171包括但不限于吸水棉网、海绵。可选地,上导板和水箱11的上端侧壁的连接可参考上文提到的第一挡水结构16和水箱11侧壁的安装方式,在此就不再赘述。
另外,值得说明的是,上文提到的前两种第一挡水结构16中,筒体12上的甩水孔121的位置都对应于水箱11的进风口的中部(即甩水孔121所形成的水幕可与从进风口进来的气体相遇)。而第三种第一挡水结构16,对应的筒体12上的甩水孔121可要高于进风口的上端面,以便水幕被水箱11的侧壁阻挡而下落而润湿下方的加湿过滤件171;也可对应于进风口,以便润湿相对应位置的加湿过滤件171,使得从进风口进来的气体和加湿过滤件171接触而被净化。
下面来描述动力部2
下文以图5所示的结构为例对动力部2及其与筒体12的配合方式进行讲解,也即是说,下文将以上方设置有上盖13,且上盖13的侧壁套设于筒体12的外侧为例,说明动力部2驱动筒体12转动的情况。但是,应该理解,筒体12的结构并不限于图5中的结构形式,其也可以是上文中提到的其他结构。
如图5所示,动力部2可包括转轴21、减速器和电机22,电机22可与外接电源电连接,电机22具有电机轴221。基体5可包括底座51,减速器可包括可转动设置于底座51的第一斜齿轮23、转动连接于水箱11底部的第二斜齿轮24,第一斜齿轮23和第二斜齿轮24相互啮合,且第二斜齿轮24可位于第一斜齿轮23上方。可以理解地,减速器的结构形式可包括但不限于上述结构。通过采用第一斜齿轮23和第二斜齿轮24等可分离的配合方式,可以便于水箱11和底座51的拆卸,从而利于水箱11的清洗和/或加水。具体而言,当需要将水箱11和底座51分离时,只需要将第一斜齿轮23和第二斜齿轮24分开即可。
另外,电机轴221可同轴连接于第一斜齿轮23。转轴21包括第一端以及第二端,转轴21的第一端可同轴连接于第二斜齿轮24,转轴21的第二端可连接于筒体12。参考图可得,转轴21的第一端可为转轴21的下端,转轴21的第二端可为转轴21的上端。可以理解地,电机22供电启动后,电机22的电机轴221可带动第一斜齿轮23转动,第一斜齿轮23可带动第二斜齿轮24转动,进而带动连接于第二斜齿轮24的转轴21转动,使得与转轴21连接的筒体12转动,实现筒体12从水箱11内吸水、扬水和喷水的功能。
下面从下到上依次介绍动力部2的安装。
电机22的安装:
如图5,电机22可包括电机主体222和电机轴221,电机主体222可悬挂安装在底座51上,以便减小电机22振动对其下方零件的影响。示例性地,电机主体222的侧壁上可连接有往电机主体222外延伸的安装爪223,安装爪223上可设有紧固孔,紧固件可穿过紧固孔和底座51连接。示意性地,在电机主体222的外侧可沿周向布置多个安装爪223,这些安装爪223可均布于电机主体222的外周,以便平衡电机22座的受力。紧固件包括但不限于螺栓、螺钉以及定位销。另外,底座51在与紧固件的连接位置可做加厚处理,以便提高底座51的承载能力。示例性地,底座51上可设有连接柱511,连接柱511远离底座51的一端可抵接于安装爪223,紧固件可穿过安装爪223的通孔并连接于连接柱511。连接柱511的个数可与安装爪223的数量一致。
此外,电机主体222的上端和底座51之间可设置减振结构,以便减小电机22所产生的振动对底座51的影响。减振结构可包括第一减振套,第一减振套可位于电机主体222的上端和底座51的下端面之间。第一减振套可由橡胶等弹性材料制成,以便能够减弱振动。
第一斜齿轮23的安装:
如图5所示,第一斜齿轮23可转动的安装于底座51的上方,电机轴221可穿过底座51与第一斜齿轮23连接。其中,电机轴221的上端可螺纹连接于,以实现电机轴221和第一斜齿轮23的安装。示例性地,电机轴221可包括相连接的第一段 和第二段,电机轴221的第一段连接于电机主体222,电机轴221的第二段螺纹连接于第一斜齿轮23。电机轴221的第一段的截面半径大于电机轴221第二段的截面半径。第一斜齿轮23的下端可抵接于电机轴221的第一段的上端面,以便阻止第一斜齿轮23朝向下方运动。另外,电机轴221的转动方向可使得第一斜齿轮23与电机轴221螺纹拧紧,以便电机轴221可带动第一斜齿轮23转动。
可选地,第一斜齿轮23和第二斜齿轮24之间可设有减振结构,以便削弱第一斜齿轮23上的振动对第二斜齿轮24的影响。减振结构可包括第二减振套,第二减振套可套设于第一斜齿轮23上,以便增大第二减振套和第一斜齿轮23之间的接触面。
第二斜齿轮24的安装:
如图5所示,第二斜齿轮24可安装于水箱11的下端,其中,为了实现动力部2和水箱11中的水的隔离,水箱11的底壁上可设有安装凹陷114,安装凹陷114具有朝向下方的开口,第二斜齿轮24至少部分安装于安装凹陷114内。安装凹陷114壳朝向水箱11内延伸,且位于筒体12内。
可选地,为了简化加工和/或装配过程,可在水箱11的底端安装底板115,底板115上可设有与安装凹陷114同轴的插入口1151。示例性地,底板115可拆卸连接于水箱11,例如,底板115和水箱11通过螺钉装配到一起。
第二斜齿轮24可设置在插入口1151的内部,以便实现模块化地安装。示例性地,插入口1151内可设有限位板1152,限位板1152及其下方的区域可限定出第二斜齿轮24的安装空间。第二斜齿轮24可转动设置在该安装空间内,以便限制第二斜齿轮24的活动区域。
基于上述,插入口1151位于第一斜齿轮23的外侧,从而通过限位板1152、插入口1151以及底座51可限定出第一斜齿轮23和第二斜齿轮24的活动区域,也即是说,第二斜齿轮24的上方被限位板1152限制,第二斜齿轮24的下方被第一斜齿轮23限制,故第二斜齿轮24的纵向上的运动将被限制,从而避免第二斜齿轮24和第一斜齿轮23脱离啮合,保证传动的可靠性。
转轴21的下端可螺纹连接于第二斜齿轮24。示例性地,电机22使得第二斜齿轮24的转动,并且第二斜齿轮24的转动方向为使得第二斜齿轮24和转轴21为相互拧紧状态,也就是说,电机22驱动第二斜齿轮24的运动方向可与转轴21脱离第二斜齿轮24的方向相反,以便第二斜齿轮24带动转轴21转动。
图16示出一种基体5的立体示意图,图18示出一种水箱以及底板的俯视图,如图16和图18所示,在底板115和底座51之间可设有减振结构,减振结构可包括第三减振垫63。电机22产生的振动一部分传递给底座51,由于第三减振垫63位于水箱11的底面和底座51的顶面之间,第三减振垫63能够通过变形来减弱振动所带来的能量,进而起到减振作用。可选地,第三减振垫63包括但不限于橡胶垫、弹簧、弹性球,弹簧片。
底座51上开有安装孔,第三减震垫63的下部分可内嵌于安装孔内。第三减震垫63的下部分可与安装孔过盈配合,以实现第三减震垫63的安装。
第三减振垫63的数量是非限制性的,其可以是一个或者多个,例如,图和图中示出了设置四个第三减振垫63。示例性地,当第三减振垫63为两个时,两个第三减振垫63可分列于第一斜齿轮23或者第二斜齿轮24的两边;当第三减振垫63为三个时,三个第三减振垫63可分布于三角形的三个顶点处,以利于对水箱11的安装可靠性;当设有四个第三减振垫63时,四个第三减振垫63可分别位于近似矩形的底座51的四个角的位置。当然,第三减振垫63的结构并不限于此,本实施例此处只是举例说明。
需要指出的是,当第三减振垫63设有多个时,必然有至少部分水箱11悬空设置于底座51,也即是说,在没有设置第三减振垫63的位置,底座51和水箱11不会接触,从而可进一步降低底座51上的振动传递到水箱11的可能性。
可选地,水箱11朝向底座51的一侧设有多个支撑凸起64,支撑凸起64用于承担水箱11对第三减振垫63的压力。其中,第三减振垫63和支撑凸起64可呈错位设置。支撑凸起64可连接于水箱11的底壁,支撑凸起64下方可设有第三减振垫63,以便减小支撑凸起64和底座51接触处的振动。
另外,第三减振垫63在水箱11轴线方向的高度可以等于支撑凸起64在水箱11轴线方向的高度。需要说明的是,第三减振垫63会受到水箱11重力的作用,故第三减振垫63使用一段时间后,第三减振垫63的变形能力可能会减弱,通过设置支撑凸起64能够减小水箱11对第三减振垫63的压力,使得第三减振垫63保持其变形能力,以便抵抗底座51所产生的振动。
此外,支撑凸起64可包括圆柱体,圆柱体的一端可连接于水箱11的底壁上,圆柱体的另一端可抵接在底座51的上端面。可选地,支撑凸起64可包括棱柱体,棱柱体的纵向截面可呈梯形设置,从棱柱体的轴线到棱柱体的边缘,棱柱体的侧壁逐渐朝向水箱11倾斜,也即是说,棱柱体靠近水箱11处的截面大于棱柱体靠近底座51处的截面。
可选地,支撑凸起64可以为一个或者多个,例如,图18中设置四个支撑凸起64。示例性地,当支撑凸起64为两个时,两个支撑凸起64可位于第一斜齿轮23或第二斜齿轮24的两边,两个支撑凸起64可呈对称设置;当支撑凸起64为三个时,三个支撑凸起64可分布位于三角形的三个顶点处,以利于对水箱11的安装可靠性;当支撑凸起64为四个时,四个支撑凸起64可分别位于矩形的四个顶点处,而且在某些示例中,这四个支撑凸起64中至少有两个支撑凸起64可呈对称设置。当然,支撑凸起64的结构并不限于此,此处只是举例说明。
如图所示,底座51上设有定位凸起513,水箱11朝向底座51的一侧设有与定位凸起513相适配的第一定位凹陷516,以便实现水箱11和底座51之间的快速安装。可选地,定位凸起513呈圆锥状,定位凸起513的横截面的半径在远离水箱11的方向上逐渐增大,以便将水箱11从底座51上取下时,能够节省力气。
可选地,底座51上设置有至少两个定位凸起513,这些定位凸起513分别位于第二斜齿轮24的两侧。第二斜齿轮24处的振动较大,振动可沿竖直方向传递,振动也可沿底座51的周向传递,当振动传递到定位凸起513时,通过定位凸起513横向截面的高低变化可以减弱振动。另外,设置多个定位凸起513,能够限制水箱11的转动。
转轴21的安装:
如图5所示,转轴21的下端可连接于第二斜齿轮24,且转轴21可从下到上依次穿过插入口1151和安装凹陷114并连接于筒体12的上端,也即是说,转轴21可转动安装于插入口1151和安装凹陷114内,安装凹陷114或插入口1151可对转轴21进行径向限位,以避免转轴21弯曲破坏。示例性地,插入口1151内可设有轴承25,转轴21可通过轴承25转动设置在插入口1151的内部,并且轴承25可对转轴21起到径向支撑的作用。可选地,限位板1152可将插入口1151分成上下方向并排布置的第一区域以及第二区域,第二斜齿轮24可位于限位板1152下方的第一区域内,轴承25可位于限位板1152上方的第二区域内,以便实现模块化安装。
可选地,第二区域内可设有油封27和垫片26,垫片26可位于轴承25和油封27之间。垫片26可隔离油封27和轴承25,且避免轴承25的滚动体滑出。油封27可对转轴21进行密封,以避免灰尘、液体等进入。
可选地,安装凹陷114的上端也可设有轴承25,以便对转轴21进行径向的支撑。安装凹陷114的上端也可设有上文提到的垫片26和油封27。
需要说明的是,安装凹陷114和插入口1151上的轴承25、垫片26以及油封27可呈对称设置。
如图5所示,转轴21的上端侧壁和筒体12的内壁之间可设有连接件28,以便通过连接件28将转轴21和筒体12连接在一起。连接件28可设置于安装凹陷114的上方(如图5所示),连接件28可包括套筒281以及连接片282,套筒281可套设于转轴21的第一端的外侧,连接片282的两侧分别连接于套筒281的外侧和筒体12的内壁,如此,可实现转轴21和筒体12之间的连接。为了提高密封性能,套筒281可以是与水箱11的底壁通过诸如注塑等一体成型的方式形成为一体件。
连接片282可设有一个或多个。当连接片282设有多个时,多个连接片282可均布于转轴21的周向,以便提高连接件28和筒体12之间的连接强度,同时,连接片282还可以起到对筒体12的支撑作用,以便提高筒体12的结构强度。
继续参考图5,转轴21的顶端可与上盖13连接,以同时驱动上盖13转动。示例性地,上盖13的内壁可设置有安装块,安装块朝向下方延伸,转轴21的上端可螺纹连接于安装块。
此外,如图5所示,安装块的外侧壁与上盖13之间可设置有加强筋,以便支撑安装块并加强安装块的强度。示例性地,加强筋的一端连接于安装块的外侧壁,加强筋的另一端朝向上盖13的内壁方向延伸并与上盖13的内壁连接。可选地,加强筋可围绕安装块的周向设置,以便增强安装块的周向强度。
可选地,如图5所示,上盖13的底壁上可连接有环状凸起,环状凸起可朝向筒体12的底端延伸。环状凸起和上盖13的侧壁之间具有间隙,筒体12的侧壁的顶端可伸入该间隙中。
需要说明的是,如图5所示,转轴21可为阶梯轴,以便对与转轴21相连接的零件进行纵向方向的限位。示例性地,转轴21可包括主体段、一级支段、二级支段以及三级支段,主体段的截面半径可大于一级支段的截面半径,一级支段的截面半径可大于二级支段的截面半径,二级支段的截面半径可大于三级支段的截面半径。
示例性地,主体段的两端分别连接第一一级支段以及第二一级支段,第一一级支段连接有第一二级支段,第二一级支段连接有第二二级支段。第一二级支段可穿设于第二斜齿轮24,第一一级支段的底端可抵接于第二斜齿轮24的顶面,以便限制第二斜齿轮24往上方移动。第一一级支段可从下到上,依次穿设于油封27、垫片26以及轴承25,主体段的下端面可抵接于轴承25的上端面。如此,下方的油封27、垫片26以及轴承25被限定在限位板1152和主体段的下端面之间。第二一级支段可从下到上,依次穿设于轴承25、垫片26以及油封27,主体段的上端面可抵接于油封27的下端面。如此,上方的轴承25、垫片26以及油封27被限定在支撑凹陷的顶壁和主体段的上端面之间。至少部分套筒281可套设于第二一级支段和第二二级支段的连接处,以便于套筒281的安装。三级支段可穿设于上盖13的安装块内,且第二二级支段的上端面可抵接于安装块的下端面。
下面对水箱11和底座51的配合方式进行说明:
参考图1和图16所示,底座51可包括底壁和侧壁,底座51的侧壁可连接于底座51的底壁的至少部分外周,且朝向上方延伸。可选地,至少部分水箱11可内嵌于底座51中,水箱11的外壁与底座51的侧壁之间形成有间隙。通过减小水箱11的外壁和底座51的侧壁之间的接触,来避免振动的传递。可选地,水箱11的外壁和底座51的侧壁之间可设有减振垫。
另外,如图1、图16和图18所示,底座51的横截面可包括弧形部和矩形部,弧形部和竖直部对应且连通。底座51的两端的形状可以设置成不一致,以便于用户找准定位,从而有利于水箱11和底座51之间的安装。此外,底座51的一侧呈开口设置,在开口处设有取放凸起514,取放凸起514的两端连接底座51的槽壁,取放凸起514和底座51的侧壁合围成一容置空间,至少部分底板115以及第一斜齿轮23可位于容置空间中,容置空间可以起到对底板115的周向进行限位的作用。底板115上可设有与取放凸起514形状相适配的避让凹陷,以便用户拿取水箱11。
可选地,底座51上可设有取出槽515,取出槽515可开设于取放凸起514背离容置空间的一侧,取出槽515的底端可低于取放凸起514的上端面。至少部分底板115和水箱11位于取放槽的上方,取放槽正对的底板115上可设有手握凸起1153,手握凸起1153可朝向取放槽延伸。以形成抓取结构和避让结构,以便于用户拿取水箱11。示例性地,当要取出水箱11时,用户可将手伸进取出槽515中,并向上握住手握凸起1153,并向外侧拉拽,即可使得第一斜齿轮23和第二斜齿轮24分离,轻松的实现水箱11和底座51的分离。可选地,如图1和图18所示,水箱11相对的两个侧壁上可设有手握凹陷116,手握凹陷116可朝水箱11内延伸。用户在取出水箱11时,也可以将手伸入手握凹陷116中,并向外拉拽水箱11。
基体5上可设有第一电触点,水箱11的侧壁设置有用于与第一电触点电连接的第二电触点,第一电触点和第二电触点可随水箱5和基体的分离而断开电接触。示例性地,底座51的侧壁上可设有第一电触电,水箱11的侧壁上可设有第二电触点。
由于底座51用以承载水箱11、动力部2以及水洗部1。故为了提高底座51的稳定性和结构强度,以便承载电机22座和水箱11的重量,可通过如下的底座加强结构来实现。
图19示出一种底座51和水箱11的立体示意图,参考图5和图19所示,底座加强结构包括辅助筋5121,辅助筋5121可连接于底座51且朝向安装爪223方向延伸,辅助筋5121的一侧可连接于上文提到的连接柱511,以便为连接柱511提供支撑。其中,辅助筋5121可设有一个或多个,多个辅助筋5121可均布设置于连接柱511的周向,以便对连接柱511的周向进行均匀支撑。
可选地,辅助筋5121的高度可高于连接柱511的高度,辅助筋5121的上端可设有限位槽,限位槽朝向连接柱511的一侧具有开口。限位槽的底壁可抵接于安装爪223的上端(或限位槽的底壁可齐平于连接柱511的底端),以便对安装爪223进行纵向方向的限位。限位槽的槽壁可抵接于安装爪223的侧壁,以便对安装爪223的外周进行限位。
可以理解地,安装爪223可包括第一侧壁、第二侧壁、第三侧壁以及第四侧壁,其中,第一侧壁和第二侧壁相对设置,第三侧壁和第四侧壁相对设置,第一侧壁可与电机主体222连接。示例性地,一个连接柱511上可连接有三个辅助筋5121,三个辅助筋5121可均布于连接柱511的侧壁,三个辅助筋5121的上端都设有限位槽,安装爪223的第二侧壁、第三侧壁以及第四侧壁可分别抵接于三个限位槽的三个槽壁,以便限制安装爪223的第二侧壁、第三侧壁以及第四侧壁。需要说明的是,此处只是距离说明,对辅助筋5121的个数不做具体限定。
可选地,底座加强结构还可包括连接凸起5122,至少部分相邻且连接于不同连接柱511的两个辅助筋5121之间可设有连接凸起5122,以便若干连接柱511连接成整体,进而提高底座51的结构强度。连接凸起5122可呈弧形,电机22可位于连接凸起5122内。可选地,连接凸起5122的高度可小于辅助筋5121的高度,以便在保证连接柱511的强度的同时,减小不必要的结构重量。
可选地,如图19所示,底座加强结构还可包括支撑筋条5123,支撑筋条5123可连接于底座51且朝向安装爪223的方向延伸,支撑筋条5123的一侧可连接于辅助筋5121,以便为辅助筋5121提供沿辅助筋5121厚度方向的支撑。支撑筋条5123可横跨辅助筋5121的高度方向(即支撑筋条5123可连接于辅助筋5121最高的高度处),以便更好地对连接柱511和安装爪223相连接的位置进行支撑。
可选地,底座加强结构还可包括径向筋条5124,径向筋条5124可连接于底座51,且可朝向安装爪223的方向延伸。径向筋条5124的一端可连接于连接凸起5122或辅助筋5121的外侧壁,径向筋条5124的另一端可延伸至底座51的边缘,以便提高底座51的整体结构强度。其中,径向筋条5124可以为多个,多个径向筋条5124可均布于连接凸起5122或辅助筋5121的外侧。另外,径向筋条5124上可设有过线凹槽5125,以便电线或者数据线过线凹槽5125上穿过。底座51上可设有限制凸起5126,限制凸起5126可包括竖直段和水平段,竖直段可朝向安装爪223方向延伸,用于供电和/或通信的线缆可从水平段与底座51之间的缝隙穿过,以便在纵向上限制线缆的移动。
可选地,如图19所示,底座加强结构还可包括周向筋条5127,周向筋条5127可套设于连接凸起5122和/或辅助筋5121的外侧,且相邻两个径向筋条5124之间可设有周向筋条5127,以便加强多个径向筋条5124之间的连接,进而加强底座51的结构强度。其中,相邻两个径向筋条5124之间可设有至少一个周向筋条5127。可以理解地,相邻两个径向筋条5124之间的周向筋条5127越多,径向筋条5124的结构更稳定。
可选地,如图5所示,底座51上可设置减振凸起,减振凸起可呈环状设置并且可朝向电机主体222的方向延伸。上文提到的第一减振套可套设于电机22座的上端,且可内嵌于减振凸起内,减振凸起可实现对减振套的限位。通过设置减振套,可以提高与电机主体222之间的接触面积,从而便提高减振效果。
下面对水箱11的其他组件进行说明。
图20示出了一种水箱11和其内部的缺水提示组件18的部分立体剖视图,图21示出一种缺水提示组件18的立体示意图,如图20和图21所示,为了便于对水箱11中的水的液位进行监测,水箱11上可设置缺水提示组件18和/或满水提示组件。水箱11上可只设有缺水提示组件18或者满水提示组件的中的一个,也可以同时设有缺水提示组件18或者满水提示组件。其中,当液位接近或者低于最低液位线时,缺水提示组件18发出提示,以便提醒用户向水箱11内进行加水;当液位接近或者高于最高液位线时,满水提示组件发出提示,以便提醒用户停止向水箱11内加水。缺水提示组件18和满水提示组件,所采用的结构可相同,下面以缺水提示组件18为例进行阐述。
具体地,如图21所示,缺水提示组件18可包括浮子181、控制器182以及报警器。其中,浮子181具有第一端和第二端,浮子181的第一端可铰接于水箱11的内表面,浮子181的第二端可随液面的变化而摆动,浮子181的第二端上可设有用于发出磁信号的磁体。值得说明的是,浮子181的密度可小于水箱11中的水的密度,即在无约束力的情况下,浮子181可漂浮于液面。当浮子181的第二端设置磁体时,浮子181的浮力可大于浮子181和磁铁的重力,以使得浮子181的第二端和磁体可一起漂浮于液面上。磁体包括但不限于磁铁。
另外,控制器182可设置于水箱11外,且用于接收磁信号并输出控制信号。需要说明的是,控制器182可设置在水箱11的外壁上,控制器182也可设置在基体5上(图20中以控制器182设置在基体5上为例示出)。可选地,基体5上可设 有安装座,控制器182可卡接于安装座,以便控制器182的检修和更换。可选地,控制器182可包括磁敏传感器,磁敏传感器是利用磁与电之间的关系(磁阻效应、磁电效应、霍尔效应等等原理)制成的传感器。磁敏传感器可通过感应磁场强度来触发信号的发生。
此外,报警器可与控制器182通信连接,且可响应于控制信号,并发出报警提示。报警器可通过声音提醒用户,也可通过闪烁的灯光来提醒用户,也可既通过声音又通过灯光来提醒用户。此外,控制器182也可控制动力部2的启闭,即可控制水洗部1的启闭。也就是说,当液位处于接近或低于最低液面时,控制器182可控制水洗部1的运转。控制器182也可控制下文提到的风机的运转。可以理解地,报警器、控制器182可由外接电源或者电池进行供电。其中,外接电源可由水洗装置的供电电源得到。
可以理解地,水箱11中的水随着使用的时间的增长,液位在不断降低。当液位降低至,至少部分浮子181的第一端露出液面时,此时浮子181可呈水平状态,此状态可一直保持到浮子181的第一端的底面完全位于漂浮于液面。当液位继续下降后,浮子181的第二端要保持漂浮于液面,故浮子181转动,浮子181的第二端上的磁体随之下移。其中,当磁体未进入控制器182的感应区域时,报警器呈关闭状态;当磁体下移至控制器182的感应区域时,控制器182发出控制信号,报警器接收控制信号,并向用户进行报警提示。如此,可通过预设液位线来设置浮子181的第一端距离水箱11的底面的高度、以及控制器182的感应区域高度,来实现低液位的提示。
可选地,如图21所示,水箱11的内壁上设有限位凸起118,限位凸起118用于限制浮子181的第二端的高度。当浮子181的第二端的上表面和限位凸起118的下表面抵接时,浮子181的第二端受到限制,将不再继续上移,如此可减小浮子181的第二端在水箱11轴线方向的行程,保护了浮子181,延长浮子181的使用寿命。
可选地,限位凸起118包括连接于水箱11的内壁的第一板体,连接于第一板体的侧壁和水箱11的内壁的第二板体。第一板体的两端可都连接有第二板体,以便提高第一板体和水箱11的内壁之间的连接强度,并提高限位凸起118的结构强度。
值得说明的是,浮子181本身可以是一个轻于水箱11内的水的具有一定强度的结构,如可用轻质木材料制成。浮子181也可包括壳体1811和浮动件1812,浮动件1812的密度低于水箱11中液体的密度,壳体1811的密度可大于水的密度,但是连接在一起的浮动件1812和壳体1811的密度可小于水的密度,壳体1811可为浮动件1812提供安装和定位。其中,浮动件1812包括但不限于防水海绵、气囊等。可选地,浮动件1812可位于壳体1811的上方、下方、左侧或右侧,浮动件1812也可位于壳体1811内。
如图21所示,浮动件1812可位于壳体1811内,用壳体1811包裹浮动件1812,以便维持浮动件1812的外形,以及便于浮子181的安装。可选地,壳体1811上可设有凹槽,浮动件1812可通过凹槽显露。壳体1811上设有凹槽以便减小壳体1811的重量,且提高浮子181的浮力。
其中,当浮动件1812位于壳体1811内时,浮动件1812可选用弹性材料。在安装浮动件1812和壳体1811时,可将浮动件1812和壳体1811过盈配合安装。壳体1811可设有安装腔,磁体可位于安装腔内,安装腔可用于将磁铁和浮动件1812隔开。浮动件1812可能会阻碍磁体的磁场强度,故将磁体和浮动件1812通过安装腔隔开,以便减小磁体的磁场强度的损失。此外,安装腔可呈弹性设置,磁体可过盈配合于安装腔。安装腔上可连接有限位块,限位块可用于限制磁体的上表面和侧壁,磁体的另一侧面可通过与安装腔过盈配合的放置固定。
另外,浮子181可拆卸连接于水箱11,以便对浮子181的检修、更换。在水箱11的底壁上可设有固定凸起,固定凸起上可设有安装孔,浮子181的两侧可设有安装凸起,安装凸起可内嵌且转动连接于安装孔。可选地,壳体1811和安装凸起之间可连接有弹性杆,弹性杆可具有沿安装孔的轴线方向的弹性变化。当要从固定凸起上拆除浮子181时,可朝向浮子181方向按压弹性杆,使得弹性杆做远离固定凸起的安装孔运动,直至安装凸起全部脱离安装孔为止。
灭菌组件8
如图20所示,水箱11的内部还可设有灭菌杀毒的组件,以便提高水的净化效果。
下面对水箱11的加水方式进行说明:
随着使用时间的增加,水箱11含水量降低,故需要对水箱11进行加水。可将水箱11从基体5上取出进行加水,也可不取出水箱11而是通过专门设置的的加水结构19进行加水。由上文中的第二挡水结构15的描述可知,某些第二挡水结构15可允许水流从其上方往下方流动,也即单向通过,尤其是允许具有一定冲击力的大量的水流从上往下通过。且为了便于用户将水箱11从基体5上取下,则水箱11的侧壁尽量不设置水管,故可应用水箱11的上端开口来进行加水,换句话说,就是利用水箱11的出风口来为水箱11加水。
其中,加水结构19包括但不限于如下几种可能的实现方式:
在其中一种可能的实现方式中,如图1所示,水箱11或第二挡水结构15的上方可设有出风罩41,出风罩41上可设有加水口191,加水口191可引导水的流向,加水口191可与水箱11的开口连通,以便对水箱11进行加水。
另一种可能的实现方式中,图12为图11在C处的放大图,如图11和图12所示,加水结构19可包括加水壳192,加水壳192可位于出风罩41的上端,加水壳192的上端可设有加水口191,以便水进入加水壳192内。加水壳192的下端可连通于出风罩41,以便加水壳192中的水进入出风罩41,并从出风罩41和水箱11相连通的地方流出出风罩41而进入水箱11内。
可选地,出风罩41上可设有出风通道42,出风通道42可连通于水箱11的上端开口和外界。加水壳192可与出风通道42连通,以便气体从出风通道42流出。示例性地,加水壳192可位于出风通道42的上方,加水壳192可呈空心设置,出水壳以及出风通道42的上端面壳构成加水通道。
可选地,加水壳192内设有单向限制组件,以便防止气体顺着加水壳192从加水口191流出。示例性地,单向限制组件壳包括单向板193以及限制组件,单向板193可铰接于加水壳192的侧壁,限制组件可用于限制单向板193只沿水流的方向转动。
示例性地,限制组件包括连接于加水壳192的侧壁的第一限制凸起194,单向板193靠近加水口191的一侧可抵接于第一限制凸起194,以便阻挡单向板193沿另一方向的转动。另外,限制组件还可包括第二限制凸起195,第二限制凸起195可连接于出风通道42的上端面,且朝向加水壳192内延伸。单向板193的下端朝向加水口191的一侧可抵接于第二限制凸起195,以便阻挡气体从单向板193的下端流过。此外,限制组件还可包括第三限制凸起196,第三限制凸起196可连接于加水壳192的上端,且朝向加水壳192内延伸。单向板193的上端可转动连接于第三限制凸起196,以便阻挡气体从单向板193的上方流过。第三限制凸起196和单向板193可密封连接,以便进一步阻挡气体的流过。
可选地,加水壳192可拆卸连接于出风罩41。示例性地,加水壳192和出风罩41之间的连接方式包括但不限于卡接、紧固件连接。
下面对水箱实现溢水处理的方式进行说明:
可以理解地,对水箱11进行加水操作时,可能所加的水量超过水箱11的最高水位线,或者上文中描述到的满水提示组件出现故障,用户无法判断所加的水量是否合理,则可通过溢水处理结构9,装置可自行进行排水操作,以避免加水过多。下文介绍几种典型的溢水处理结构9的实现方式,但并不限于此:
在其中一种可能的实现方式中,图22示出一种溢水处理结构、水箱11以及基体5配合的立体示意图,图23示出与溢水处理结构对应的基座的部分立体示意图,如图22和图23所示,水箱11的侧壁可连通有第一排水管71,第一排水管71可位于水箱11的最高水位线的上方,水箱11设置的进风口的下方。水箱11外可设有导流组件,以便将第一排水管71内水平流向的水流转换成竖直流向的。示例性地,如图所示,导流组件还可包括储水盒72,第一排水管71可连通于储水盒72,储水盒72的底端可设有出水口,出水口上可连接有出水管,多余的水可经出水管排出到指定位置。对于基体5高于水箱11的进风口的情况,可参考下文对进风部3的描述,气体可从基体5的下方进来,并经过基体5的内壁和水箱11的外壁之间形成的进风风道,使气体从水箱11设的进风口进入水箱11内。故为了不影响气体的流动,第一排水管71可设置在没有进风风道的地方,即基体5的内壁和水箱11的外壁相连接的地方,且远离进风风道。
另外,基体5的侧壁可设有长条形通孔525,第一排水管71可从内到外穿设于长条形通孔525内。可以理解地,水箱11可按照上文种描述的方式安装于基体5,故在抽取水箱11时,需要先将水箱11抬起后再抽出,通过设置长条形通孔525,可 以便于水箱11从基体5上抽出时,为第一排水管71的移动提供空间。
此外,储水盒72的一侧可连接于基体5的外侧壁,且该侧壁上可设有预留孔721,第一排水管71可穿过预留孔721进入储水盒72内。储水盒72的侧壁和基体5的侧壁可密封连接,以防止漏水。
可选地,如图22和图23所示,基体5的侧壁上可设有上限位凹陷521,上限位凹陷521可朝向基体5的内侧延伸,储水盒72的顶壁可抵接于上限位凹陷521的顶壁,以便限制储水盒72沿水箱11的轴线方向的高度。另外,储水盒72的顶壁上可设有插接板,插接板可相对于储水盒72的顶端朝向上方弯折。上限位凹陷521的顶壁上可设有插接孔5211,插接板可配合于插接孔5211,以便限制储水盒72沿水箱11的径向方向的位置。其中,“配合”指的是,插接板可穿设插接孔5211。此外,基体5的侧壁上还可设有下限位板526,下限位板526可用于支撑储水盒72的下端。
可选地,如图22所示,储水盒72的下端可设有连接座73,连接座73可包括侧壁和底壁,连接座73可呈角型设置,且连接座73靠近基体5的侧壁的一侧呈开口设置,以便连接座73与基体5的对应安装。连接座73的侧壁和基体5的侧壁可通过紧固件连接。在紧固件连接的位置,基体5的侧壁可设有立柱522,立柱522的轴向可设有加强筋,以便提高立柱522的强度。紧固件可穿设于连接座73并连接于立柱522,如此可方便地实现储水盒72与基体5的侧壁的安装。
可选地,连接座73的侧壁上可设有安装盒74,安装盒74内可安装有上文提到的用于进行水位提示的控制器182。控制器182可卡接或者过渡配合于安装盒74中。另外,基体5的侧壁上可设有容纳腔523,安装盒74可插入容纳腔523内,容纳腔523可为安装盒74提供支撑。此外,安装盒74与容纳腔523可过渡配合,以便实现安装盒74与容纳腔523的连接。
图24示出一种安装盒74的示意图,如图22和图24所示,安装盒74具有朝向基体5的开口,控制器卡接于安装盒74,控制器的信号接收端显露于安装盒74的开口。
安装盒74包括呈弹性设置的卡接板741,卡接板741靠近安装盒74的开口一端设有第一限位块742,第一限位块742朝向安装盒74的内侧延伸,第一限位块742用于限制控制器182滑出安装盒74。
第一限位块742的入口端设有斜面,沿着控制器182进入安装盒74的运动方向,第一限位块742的斜面逐渐朝向安装盒74的内侧倾斜,以便对控制器182进行引导。
安装盒74设有第二限位块743,至少部分控制器182的两侧分别抵接于第一限位块742和第二限位块743。
安装盒74设有滑道745,控制器182滑设于滑道745,滑道745的一端与安装盒74的开口连接。可选地,滑道745的入口端设有斜面,沿着控制器182滑入方向,斜面逐渐朝向安装盒的内侧倾斜。以便增大滑道的入口端的面积,以便控制器182进入滑道。
另外,储水盒72、连接座73以及安装盒74可一体成型设置,即导流组件可通过诸如注塑的方式一体成型,以便提高承载能力。另外,导流组件不仅可用于溢水处理还可用于安装控制器182,不仅便于安装且合理运用空间,实现装置的模块化。
可选地,连接座73的底壁可设有过线凹陷731,过线凹陷731可朝向储水盒72方向延伸,并具有朝向下方的开口。过线凹陷731远离基体5的一端可呈开口设置。过线凹陷731靠近安装盒74的一侧可设有过线孔。可以理解地,与控制器182连接的电线可穿过过线孔而进入过线凹陷731内,并从过线凹陷731的开口穿出连接座73。
可选地,基体5上可设有平台524,连接座73的底壁可抵接于平台524,以便限定连接座73在水箱11的轴线方向的位置,且平台524可支撑连接座73。另外,平台524上可设有贯穿孔,与电机22和/或风机连接的电线可从贯穿孔穿出,并沿过线凹陷731的开口穿出连接座73,如此,实现电线的收纳和明确电线的走向。
在另一种可能的实现方式中,可不设置导流组件,而如图5所示,直接在水箱11下方的底座51上开设出水孔722,出水孔722上连接有出水管。超量的水可从进风口溢出到基体5和水箱11之间的缝隙中,并沿着基体5的侧壁下落而流入出水孔722中。
值得说明的是,空气净化装置整体的风向流动可以是从侧面进入,然后从顶面或者侧面流出,或者,也可以是从底面进入,然后从顶面或者侧面流出。进风方式的不同导致进风部3的不同,而进风部3依托于基体5设置,故不同的进风方式对应的基体5的形状可不相同。另外,虽然进风方式不同,但是上文提到的动力部2、水箱11以及水洗部1的结构形式可相同。
基体5包括上文提到的底座51以及基壳,底座51可用于动力部2、水箱11、水洗部1的安装,基壳用于进风部3的安装。底座51位于基壳内。不同的进风方式的基体5,其底座51的结构可大致相同,即动力部2与底座51的安装、水箱11与底座51的安装、水洗部1与底座51的配合,都可按照上文所描述的方式进行设置。而基体5的基壳的结构则有所不同,为了便于描述,可按照进风方式的不同,将基壳分为第一基壳53、第二基壳54以及第三基壳55。当然基壳的结构形式可不限于本文提到情况,此处只是举例说明。
下面首先结合侧面进风、侧面出风的方式,来具体描述空气净化装置的进风部3和出风部4。
图1和图16示出的基体,是以从侧方进风的空气净化装置为例的,如图1和图16所示,基体5可包括第一基壳53和底座51,第一基壳53可包括顶壁和侧壁。第一基壳53的顶壁的内侧可连接于底座51的上端侧壁的外周,第一基壳53的侧壁可连接于第一基壳53的顶壁的外侧,且朝向下方延伸。第一基壳53的侧壁和底座51的侧壁之间可设有上文提到的径向筋条5124,径向筋条5124上可设有凹槽,以便用于供电和/或通信的线缆通过,而且还可以实现减重的目的。
图25示出一种空气净化装置的俯视图,图26示出图25在M-M处的部分立体剖视图,如图1和图26所示,进风部3还可包括初级过滤组件31,以便对要进入水箱11的气体进行初级过滤。图17示出一种初级过滤组件31的立体示意图,如图17所示,初级过滤组件31可包括过滤层311以及过滤架312。过滤层311可套设于水箱11的进风口的外侧,过滤架312可套设于过滤层311的外侧。当水箱11主要由弧形部和竖直部连接而成时,进风口可设置在弧形部上,初级过滤组件31则设置于水箱11的弧形部的外侧。为了便于描述,以下定义水箱11的弧形部为水箱11的前端,定义水箱11的竖直部为水箱11的后端。
可以理解地,过滤架312上可设有贯穿孔,以便外界气体从贯穿孔进入并穿过过滤层311进行初级过滤,再从水箱11的进风口进入水箱11内并被水幕进行净化。示例性地,过滤架312可包括侧壁、上壁以及底壁,过滤架312的上壁和过滤架312的底壁分别连接于过滤架312的侧壁的两端,且都可朝向水箱11的轴线方向延伸。过滤架312的侧壁、上壁以及底壁限定出用于安装过滤层311的安装空间。
可选地,参考图1和图26所示,过滤架312的上壁可连接于水箱11的上端。示例性地,水箱11的上端侧壁上呈阶梯状设置,以便形成用于连接第二挡水结构15的放置凹槽112和用于连接第一挡水结构16的限位凹槽113。可以理解地,放置凹槽112的底壁可抵接于过滤架312的上壁,以便限制过滤架312的纵向高度。
可选地,继续结合图1和图26可得,过滤架312的底壁可连接于第一基壳53的上端面,第一基壳53可用于支撑过滤架312。另外,在径向方向上,过滤架312的底壁的长度可超出过滤层311的厚度。也就是说,过滤架312的底壁至少部分未被过滤层311覆盖。水箱11的外侧壁上可连接有限制板101,限制板101可抵接于过滤架312的底壁超出过滤层311的部分的上端面,以便实现对过滤架312的纵向方向上的定位。另外,水箱11的侧壁可连接有抵接凸起102,抵接凸起102可朝向水箱11的外侧延伸,抵接凸起102可抵接于过滤层311厚度方向的一侧。可以理解地,过滤架312的侧壁和抵接凸起102可限制过滤层311的厚度方向的位移。
可选地,结合图16和图17,第一基壳53的前端的上端面可设有限定凸起531,限定凸起531的内壁可抵接于过滤架312前端的外侧壁,以便对过滤架312的径向进行限位。示例性地,过滤架312和过滤层311可设计为弧形,限定凸起531的形状可与过滤层311的形状相匹配,以便贴合于过滤架312的外侧壁。
可选地,限定凸起531上可设有定位孔532。过滤架312的外侧壁上可连接有定位板313,定位板313可朝向背离水箱11的轴线方向延伸。定位板313可配合连接于定位孔532。示例性地,定位板313的至少一部分可穿设于定位孔532。可以理解地,当将过滤架312安装到第一基壳53上时,只需将定位板313伸出定位孔532即可,便于过滤架312的定位和安装。另外,定位孔532可朝向平行或重合于第一基壳53的对称轴线的方向设置,以便安装过滤架312时,只需沿该方向推动过滤架312上的定位板313穿过定位孔532即可,从而可以实现快捷安装。
可选地,继续结合图5和图19可得,第一基壳53后端的上端面上可设有限定凹陷533,过滤架312的底壁上可设置有插接凸起314,插接凸起314可配合连接于限定凹陷533。示例性地,插接凸起314可包括连接于过滤架312的底壁的竖直段,相对于竖直段朝向过滤架312的前端弯折的水平段。限定凹陷533的上端可呈开口设置,限定凹陷533包括槽壁和槽底,位 于前端的限定凹陷533的槽壁可设有插孔534,插接凸起314的水平段可插入插孔534内,以便实现对过滤架312的限位和安装。可以理解地,插接凸起314的水平段可在限定凹陷533的槽底上滑动,以便限制过滤架312的运动轨迹。
可选地,第一基壳53前端的顶面设有前凸起535,过滤架312的底壁上可设有配合于前凸起535的凹槽,以便至少部分限制过滤架312的前后移动。在某些示例中,前凸起535从上到下的截面逐渐增大,也即是说,前凸起535大致呈锥形。
可选地,第一基壳53上可设有用于安装缺水提示装置的控制器182的置物凹陷536(底座51对应的面上也设有开口),过滤架312的底壁可用于遮挡置物凹陷536,以便对连接于控制器182的电线起限制作用。第一基壳53上可设有接线孔537,以便线缆的走线。
关于出风部4:
如图26所示,出风部4可包括出风罩41,出风罩41可呈空心设置,且出风罩41的下端可设有连通于水箱11的上端的开口。出风罩41内可设有风机,以便引导气体进入水箱11并从水箱11中形成的水幕穿过。出风罩41上设有出风口,以便气体的导出。
示例性地,风机的类型可为离心式、轴流式、斜流式(混流式)或横流式等。图1以离心风机为例示出,其他种类的的风机可参考得出。其中,离心风机431可包括叶轮4311以及用于驱动叶轮4311的离心电机4312。其中叶轮4311可包括轮毂和扇片。可以理解地,离心电机4312启动时,叶轮4311转动,流道(相邻两个扇片可构成一个流道)内的空气,受离心力作用而向外运动,在叶轮4311中央产生真空度。因而从水箱11的上端开口出来的气体被吸入叶轮4311内,被吸入的气体在叶轮4311入口处折转90°后,进入流道,在扇片作用下获得动能和压能。从流道甩出的气流进入出风罩41,经集中导流后,从出风罩41的出风口排出。
可以理解地,扇片可呈倾斜设置,扇片的倾斜方向可与叶轮4311的转动方向相反。下文可以扇叶43111顺时针设置,且叶轮4311逆时针转动为例进行说明。此处叶轮4311转动的方向也可为顺时针,当叶轮4311顺时针转动,出风罩41的设置方式可参考
如图1和图26所示,为了方便风机的安装,出风罩41可包括上罩体433和下罩体432,上罩体433可拆卸连接于下罩体432。下罩体432上可设有呈贯穿设置的中心孔,中心孔的下端可连通于水箱11上端开口。
下面从下到上来描述下罩体432的结构。
如图1和图26所示,下罩体432可包括安装部和引导部,安装部可用于连接于水箱11和/或过滤架312,引导部用于引导出风罩41内气体的流向。示例性地,图27示出部分水箱11和下罩体432连接位置的示意图,如图26和图27所示,安装部可包括第一安装段4321,第一安装段4321可呈环状设置,且可套设于水箱11的上端外侧壁。水箱11的上端外侧壁和第一安装段4321的内壁之间可设有减振结构,减振结构可包括减振衬垫65,以便减小第一安装段4321和水箱11连接位置的噪音。另外减振衬垫65还可起到密封的作用,以便阻挡被甩出的洗涤液流到下罩体432的外侧。
另外,当水箱11的侧壁设置有初级过滤组件31时,安装部还可包括第二安装段4322,第二安装段4322可包括侧壁和上壁,第二安装段4322的上壁可相对第一安装段4321朝向外侧弯曲(此处的“外侧”指的是下罩体432的外侧),第二安装段4322的侧壁可相对第二安装段4322的上壁朝向下方弯曲。第二安装段4322的上壁可抵接于过滤架312的上端面,第二安装段4322的侧壁可套设于过滤架312的上端外侧。如此,过滤架312的上、下两端分别被第二安装段4322的上壁和第一基壳53的上端面限制,过滤架312的内、外两侧分别被水箱11和第二安装段4322的侧壁限制,以便实现第二安装段4322对过滤架312的高度方向的限制,以及对过滤架312的厚度方向(即过滤架312的径向方向)的限制。
此外,如图1所示,第一安装段4321和第二安装段4322的上壁之间可设有第一加强板4341,以便加强第一安装段4321和第二安装段4322之间的连接。
可选地,如图26所示,引导部可包括连接于第一安装段4321的上端外周的集中板4323,集中板4323上可设有呈贯穿设置的集中孔,集中孔可对应于叶轮4311的进风口。进入第一安装段4321内的气体,可从集中孔穿过,以便减小下罩体432的横截面积的半径,使得气体向叶轮4311的进风口位置集中,有利于气体进入叶轮4311中。
引导部还可包括呈环状设置的第一引导凸起4324,第一引导凸起4324位于叶轮4311的下方,且可连接于集中孔的周向,并可朝向叶轮4311的内部弯曲,以便引导被净化后的气体进入离心风机431的叶轮4311。其中,至少部分第一引导凸起4324内嵌于离心风机431的叶轮4311中,以便于第一引导凸起4324的径向段和叶轮4311的顺利对接。可以理解地,第一安装段4321、集中板4323以及第一引导凸起4324可限定出第一引导风道。
此外,图28示出图1在第一出风孔43281的中间位置的横向剖视图,如图26和图28所示,第一引导凸起4324的上端内壁可连接有均衡板4325,以便将气体分散成若干区域,以便实现均匀出风。其中“均匀出风”指的是,位于同一径向位置的区域的气体的流量可相同。示例性地,均衡板4325可包括周向缘条43251以及径向缘条432542。周向缘条43251可呈环状设置,且可位于第一引导凸起4324内,并可与第一引导凸起4324呈同心设置。径向缘条432542可沿第一引导凸起4324的径向设置,且可将第一引导凸起4324和周向缘条43251连接在一起,以便形成若干区域。
可以理解地,如图26所示,离心风机431的轮毂可包括进风段以及位于进风段上方的连接段,进风段用于引导气体进入,连接段用于安装离心电机4312。进风段和连接段可通过扇片连接。其中,从上到下,进风段逐渐朝向叶轮4311的外侧弯曲,以便将气体引导到叶轮4311的外侧。
另外,如图26所示,下罩体432在设计时,考虑到为了更加贴合离心风机431的进风段,或者为了将气体向叶轮4311地外侧进行引导,可通过以下设置来实现。示例性地,引导部可包括第二引导凸起4326,第二引导凸起4326可呈环状设置,第二引导凸起4326可套设于轮毂的进风段的外侧,且可连接于集中板4323,并可朝向叶轮4311的外侧弯曲。第二引导凸起4326和轮毂的进风段之间限定出第二引导通道422。
示例性地,第二引导凸起4326可包括轴向段和径向段,第二引导凸起4326的轴向段可连接于且集中板4323,且朝向上方延伸。第二引导凸起4326的径向段可相对于第二引导凸起4326的轴向段朝向叶轮4311的外侧弯曲。轮毂的进风段可位于第一引导凸起4324和第二引导凸起4326之间。
另外,位于轮毂的进风段和第二引导凸起4326之间的集中板4323上可设有出气孔43231。可以理解地,从水箱11出来的一部分气体从上述出气孔43231中穿出并进入第二引导通道422中,从水箱11出来的另一部分气体可通过第一引导风道进入叶轮4311内,并经叶轮4311的流道与流出第二引导通道422的气体汇合。
可选地,引导部还可包括第三引导凸起4327和第四引导凸起4328,第三引导凸起4327可连接于第二引导凸起4326,并朝向下罩体432的外侧延伸。第四引导凸起4328可相对于第三引导凸起4327朝向上方弯曲,第四引导凸起4328上可设有第一出风孔43281。第三引导凸起4327以及第四引导凸起4328可限制出第三引导通道423,以便将气体从第一出风孔43281引出出风罩41。另外,位于下罩体432上的第一出风孔43281的上端可呈开口设置,且第一出风孔43281的开口高度可大于叶轮4311的流道的高度,以便保证从叶轮4311流道出来的气体可顺利进入第一出风孔43281。
可选地,如图1、图26以及图28所示,第一出风孔43281可设有一个,第一出风孔43281也可设有多个。第一出风孔43281设有一个的情况很常见,在此就不再赘述。图26以所示,当第一出风孔43281设有多个时,相邻两个第一出风孔43281之间的第四引导凸起4328,沿着叶轮4311转动的方向,从一个第一出风孔43281到另一个第一出风孔43281,第四引导凸起4328可朝向逐渐远离叶轮4311的外周方向弯曲,以便逐渐引导气体的流向,减小气体与第四引导凸起4328之间的能量损耗。另外,多个第一出风孔43281可呈对称设置,以便平衡气体的流量,使得水洗空气维持稳定。
可以理解地,本申请的水洗空气净化装置可应用于落地式空调设备,故适用于用户对出风高度的要求,可将出风罩41的出风处做向上调整,以扩大出风高度。示例性地,如图1和图26所示,第四引导凸起4328可设有侧引导凹陷43282,侧引导凹陷43282可朝向下罩体432的外侧延伸,侧引导凹陷43282上可设有第二出风孔43283,第二出风孔43283的出风高度可高于第一出风孔43281的出风高度。其中,从下罩体432的轴线到下罩体432的外周方向,侧引导凹陷43282的底壁可逐渐朝向上方倾斜,以便将位于第三引导通道423的气体向上方进行引导。可以理解地,侧引导凹陷43282的侧壁以及其底壁可限定出第四引导通道424,第四引导通道424可连通于第三引导通道423,可将气体向上引导,并从第二出风孔43283流出。
另外,如图1所示,还可以在第一出风孔43281内可设置上扬板43284,沿着叶轮4311的转动方向,上扬板43284逐渐 朝上倾斜,以便得到倾斜向上运动的气体。上扬板43284可均布设置于第一出风孔43281的高度方向,以便于均匀出风。
可选地,如图28所示,相邻的第一出风孔43281和第二出风孔43283,沿着叶轮4311转动的方向,从一个第一出风孔43281(或第二出风孔43283)到另一个第二出风孔43283(或第一出风孔43281),第四引导可凸起可朝向逐渐远离叶轮4311的外周方向弯曲。
可选地,如图1所示,第二引导凸起4326的外侧可连接有加强结构,加强结构可为第二加强板54344342,第二加强板54344342的上到下两端可分别连接于第三引导凸起4327和第一引导凸起4324,以便提高下罩体432的承载能力。
可选地,如图28所示,上罩体433上的第一出风孔43281以及第二出风孔43283的分布可呈对称设置,两个第一出风孔43281或者两个第二出风孔43283可分列于对称轴线的两侧,一以便提高出风罩41的出风的平衡性。示例性地,两个第二出风孔43283可位于下罩体432的前端,两个第一出风孔43281可位于下罩体432的后端。其中,下罩体432的前端和水箱11的前端方向一致,下罩体432的后端与水箱11的后端的方向一致。
为了得到上述的对称性要求,相邻的两个第一出风孔43281之间(或者第一出风孔43281和第二出风孔43283之间),第四引导凸起4328可具有相应的曲线转折变化。下面以两个第一出风孔43281之间的第四引导凸起4328为例,进行简单说明。其中,相邻的两个呈平行设置的两个第四引导凸起4328之间可限定出第一进风口。
示例性地,第一出风孔43281可包括第一端和第二端,沿着叶轮4311的转动方向,第一端可位于第二端之前。如图27所示,右侧的第一出风孔43281的第二端可通过第四引导凸起4328来连接于左侧的第一出风孔43281的第一端。其中第四引导凸起4328可包括第一平直段43285、弧形段43286以及第二平直段43287,第一平直段43285可连接于右侧的第一出风孔43281的第二端,第二平直段43287可连接于第二出风孔43283的第一端,第一平直段43285和第二平直段43287可呈对称设置,以便确定两个对称的第一出风孔43281的对称基准;圆弧可包括第一端和第二端,逆着叶轮4311的转动方向,弧形段43286的第一端可连接于第二平直段43287,弧形段43286的第二端可朝向逐渐靠近叶轮4311方向弯曲,且弧形段43286的第二端可低于弧形段43286的第一端。以便随着叶轮4311转动,气体可平顺进入左侧的第一出风孔43281内;弧形段43286的第二端和第一平直段43285可具有过渡段43288,以便气体的顺利进入右侧的第一出风孔43281内。
可选地,由图28可知,过渡段43288具有明显的突变点,即明显的角度变化点,故为了提高第四引导凸起4328在过渡段43288位置的结构强度,即为了提高在截面突变点位置的结构强度,引导部还可包括过渡板,过渡板可将过渡段43288和至少部分弧形段43286连接。
下面来描述上罩体433:
如图1和图26所示,上罩体433可包括上罩板4331,上罩板4331可用于封盖下罩体432上的中心孔。风机可悬挂安装于上罩体433上,以便降低风机的振动对出风罩41的影响。上罩体433和下罩体432可通过紧固件进行连接,示例性地,下罩体432的第四引导凸起4328的上端可连接有下罩板4329,下罩板4329可朝向叶轮4311的外侧延伸。至少部分上罩板4331的下端可抵接于下罩板4329的上端,并可通过紧固件连接在一起。
另外,下罩板4329上可连接有下罩凸缘43291,下罩凸缘43291可朝上延伸,且下罩凸缘43291和第四引导凸起4328之间可设有预设间隙。上罩板4331的侧壁可内嵌于下罩凸缘43291内,以便限制上罩板4331的移动。另外,上罩板4331的外周可连接有上罩凸缘43311,以便加强上罩板4331的结构强度。上罩凸缘43311可朝向上方延伸且内嵌于下罩凸缘43291内。
此外,下罩板4329的下端可连接有紧固凸起43292,紧固件可依次穿过上罩板4331和下罩板4329,并螺纹连接于紧固凸起43292。
可选地,如图26所示,上罩板4331上可设有上引导凹陷4332,上引导凹陷4332可朝向上方延伸,以便增大第一出风孔43281和/或第二出风孔43283的出风高度和面积。示例性地,上引导凹陷4332可包括第一端和第二端,沿着叶轮4311转动的方向,上引导凹陷4332的高度逐渐增大。即上引导凹陷4332的第二端的高度高于上引导凹陷4332的第一端的高度。上引导凹陷4332的第二端上可呈开口设置,且连通于第一出风孔43281和/或第二出风孔43283。其中,每个第一出风孔43281和/或第二出风孔43283都连接有相应的上引导凹陷4332。
可以理解地,当不设置上引导凹陷4332时,上罩板4331、第三引导凸起4327以及第四引导凸起4328限定出第三引导通道423,第一出风孔43281和/或第二出风孔43283地高度一定低于上罩板4331和第三引导凸起4327之间的高度。而当设置上引导凹陷4332时,可将气体的向上方引导,也增高了第一出风孔43281和/或第二出风孔43283的高度。
可选地,图29示出图25在N-N处的部分剖视图,如图25、图26以及图29所示,风机和上罩体433之间可设有连接垫片66,连接垫片66可选用橡胶材料制成,以便具有减振效果。在装配风机时,可使用紧固件依次穿过上罩体433以及连接垫片66与风机连接。
可选地,上罩体433上可设有朝向上方延伸的上凹陷,至少部分风机可内嵌于上述上凹陷内,以便通过上凹陷对风机进行定位。
可选地,上罩体433的上端可设有定位槽,连接垫片66上可连接有定位凸缘661,定位凸缘661可朝向上罩体433延伸并伸入该定位槽。定位凸缘661的外侧壁可抵接于定位槽的槽壁。
值得说明的是,可通过定位槽的形状设计来降低确定风机相对于上罩体433的相对位置的难度。示例性地,定位槽可为不对称形状,定位槽也可为对称的形状,例如定位槽可呈“十”字形。
示例性地,如图29所示,连接垫片66上可连接有加强柱662,上罩体433上可设有至少两个通孔。加强柱662可包括第一端和第二端,加强柱662的第一端的截面可大于加强柱662的第二端的截面。加强柱662的第一端可位于上罩体433的上方,加强柱662的第一端的下端面可抵接于通孔的外周,加强柱662的第二端可穿设于上罩体433的通孔且与连接垫片66连接。紧固件可穿设于加强柱662、连接垫片66与风机连接。如此,通过连接垫片66和加强柱662,将风机和上罩体433隔绝,加强柱662、连接垫片66可为橡胶材质的,以便于减弱风机对上罩体433的影响。
可选地,图30示出部分上罩体433的立体示意图,如图1、图26以及图30所示,由于上罩体433用于连接风机,故上罩体433可设置加强结构来加强上罩体433的结构强度。示例性地,上罩体433上设有槽和孔的地方(例如通孔和定位槽),都绕着槽和孔的外周设置一圈第一加强凸起4343,以便提高槽和孔位置的结构强度。上罩体433上设置的定位槽或者多个通孔,可集中在上罩体433的中间位置。相邻两个第一加强凸起4343之间可通过第四加强凸起4349连接,第四加强凸起4349可呈弧状设置。
可选地,上罩体433上可连接有呈环状设置的第二加强凸起4344。上罩体433上的多个通孔可位于第二加强凸起4344的内部,以便进一步提高槽和孔位置的结构强度。
可选地,第一加强凸起4343的外侧和第二加强凸起4344的内侧之间来连接有第一径向凸起4345,第一径向凸起4345不仅能将第一加强凸起4343和第二加强凸起4344连接在一起,以便提高上罩体433的整体性。第一径向凸起4345还能够用于支撑第一加强凸起4343和第二加强凸起4344。
可选地,在上罩体433设置的上凹陷的外侧可设有呈环状设置的第三加强凸起4346,以便提高上凹陷位置的结构强度。另外,上壳体1811上的通孔或者安装槽可设于上凹陷上,以便于上罩体433和风机的连接。
可选地,第三加强凸起4346和第二加强凸起4344之间设有第二径向凸起4347。其中,第一径向凸起4345和第二径向凸起4347可分别均布于第二加强凸起4344和第三加强凸起4346的周向,且第二径向凸起4347和第一径向凸起4345可错位设置。第二径向凸起4347可朝向第二加强凸起4344的径向延伸。可以理解地,第二径向凸起4347也可将第一加强凸起4343和第二加强凸起4344连接在一起,以便进一步提高上罩体433的结构强度。
可选地,上罩体433上还设有第三径向凸起4348,第三径向凸起4348可连接于第三加强凸起4346上且朝向外罩体的外周沿伸,以便提高上罩体433的整体结构强度。
可选地,图31示出图26在F的放大图,如图26和图31所示,上罩体433上可设有电容启动器4334,用于帮助启动风机。示例性地,上罩体433上设有放置腔,以便限制和固定电容启动器4334。放置腔可由多个连接于上罩体433的放置凸起4335限定而成。至少两个放置凸起4335由弹性材料制成,以便抵紧于电容启动器4334的侧壁,从而固定住电容启动器4334。放置凸起4335的高度可低于电容启动器4334的高度,以便与操作人员进行安装或者维护。
另外,至少两个呈相对设置的放置凸起4335的上端可各连接有一卡接块4336,卡接块4336可朝向电容启动器4334方向延伸,以便限制电容启动器4334在高度方向的运动。电容启动器4334的相对两端可卡接于两个卡接块4336。示例性地,卡接块4336背离放置凸起4335的一端可具有引导斜面1613,从电容启动器4334的外周到电容启动器4334的轴线方向,引导斜面1613可逐渐朝向下方延伸,以便引导电容启动器4334的放置。值得说明的是,连接有卡接块4336的放置凸起4335或者卡接块4336,可具有沿卡接块4336的延伸方向的弹性位移。
需要说明的是,如图1和图26所示,上罩体433上还可设有多个呈环状设置的加强凸起,相邻两个加强凸起之间都可通过径向凸起连接。
可选地,如图30所示,径向凸起和呈环状设置的加强凸起上可设有过线凹槽,以便用于供电和/或通信的线缆穿过。上罩体433上还可设有固线凸起4337,以便线缆的固定。固线凸起4337可成对设置。固线凸起4337可包括第一端和第二端,固线凸起4337的第一端可连接于上罩体433,固定凸起的第二端可朝向上方延伸,固线凸起4337的第二端可相对于固线凸起4337的第一端朝下方弯折。两个固线凸起4337的第二端相对的两个面倾斜设置,具体而言,是从固定凸起的外侧到固定凸起的内侧逐渐朝向下方倾斜,以便引导用于供电和/或通信的线缆从上到下插进两个固线凸起4337之间。
综上所述,在侧向进风方式下,气体的流动过程的一种可能的实现方式为:外界的含尘气体在离心风机431的引导下,从侧方进入初级过滤组件31,经初级过滤组件31进行初步过滤后,从水箱11的进风口进入水箱11,并与水箱11内的被甩出的洗涤液接触,而得到净化后的气体。净化后的气体从水箱11的上端流出水箱11,并进入离心风机431的叶轮4311转向,从出风罩41上的第一出风孔43281和/或第二出风孔43283出来。
下面再对下进风方式进行介绍。需要指出的是,在对下进风方式进行描述的时候,其与侧进风相同的结构将简述或者予以省略。
图32为另一种空气净化装置的立体示意图,如图32所示,一种下方进风的空气净化装置根据气体的流动方向,包括进风部3、水洗部1以及出风部4。进风部3位于整个装置的最下方,水洗部1位于进风部3的上方,出风部4位于水洗部1上方。外界的含尘气体从下方进入进风部3,并经进风部3引导进入水洗部1的水箱11中,经水箱11中的水洗组件净化得到洁净气体,洁净气体经出风部4流出到外界。
值得说明的是,下方进风与侧向进风的不同之处在于对含尘气体进入水箱11的引导,即进风通道不同。示例性地,侧向进风时,可以理解地,含尘气体可直接自水箱11的侧壁设置的进风口进入水箱11;下方进风时,含尘气体自水箱11的下方,并需经进风部3的引导从水箱11的进风口进入水箱11。风机可安装在下方的进风部3或上方的出风部4中。当风机位于下方的进风部3时,可便降低空气净化装置的重心,使得该装置更加稳定。下文中以风机设置在进风部3中为例,来阐述下方进风时,装置的各组件的分布情况。
可以理解地,风机位于进风部3时,由于进风部3位于装置的下端,由上文中可知动力部2也位于装置的下端,故如何解决风机和动力部2的电机22的安装、以及如何将从下方进入的气体进行向上引导为需要解决的问题。
其中,对于风机和电机22的安装方式,包括但不限于如下可能的实现方式:
在其中一种可能的实现方式中,图33示出一种空气净化装置的动力部的部分剖视图,如图33所示,电机22为双轴电机29,双轴电机29包括双轴电机主体291、第一电机轴292以及第二电机轴293。风机可包括风扇32。
示例性地,第一电机轴292从双轴电机主体291向上延伸,第二电机轴293从双轴电机主体291向下延伸。第一电机轴292可连接于第一斜齿轮23,以便筒体12转动甩水以在水箱11内形成水幕。第二电机轴293连接于风扇32,以便驱动风扇32转动,进而将含尘气体从下方送入上方的水箱11。可以理解地,第一斜齿轮23和风扇32都可通过同一个电机22驱动,可降低成本和重量,且便于安装。
可选地,双轴电机29可悬挂安装于底座51,具体的实施方式可参考上文中的电机22和底座51的安装。也即在双轴电机主体291的外周均布设置安装爪223,安装爪223上可设有通孔,紧固件可穿过通孔与底座51连接。另外,由于双轴电机主体291的下端连接有风扇32,故重量增加。为了提高连接的稳定性,至少两个安装爪223上的通孔距离电机22座的侧壁的距离设置成不相等。示例性地,双轴电机主体291的周向可均布设置有多个第一安装爪223,相邻两个第一安装爪223之间可设有一个第二安装爪223,第一安装爪223上可设有第一通孔,第二安装爪223上可设有第二通孔,第一通孔距离双轴电机主体291的侧壁的距离小于第二通孔距离双轴电机主体291的侧壁的距离。另外,第一安装爪223和第二安装爪223可设置于双轴电机主体291的同一轴向位置或不同的轴向位置。
可选地,风扇32可包括风扇32罩壳,连接于风扇32罩壳的侧壁的至少两个风扇32叶片161。为了减小基体5纵向方向的高度,风扇32罩壳可套设于双轴电机主体291的下端,并且该风扇32罩壳可相对双轴电机主体291转动。示例性地,第二电机轴293上套设有限位挡圈294,第二电机轴293远离双轴电机主体291的一端可从上到下贯穿风扇32罩壳。第二电机轴293穿出风扇32罩壳的一端可螺纹连接有螺母295,限位挡圈294可抵接于风扇32罩壳的底壁上端。可通过旋转螺母295,可使得风扇32罩壳的底壁被夹紧在限位挡圈294和螺母295之间。
为了提高风扇32罩壳在连接位置的强度,风扇32罩壳上可选地设有加强块233。加强块233可包括第一端和第二端,加强块233的第一端可位于风扇32罩壳内,限位挡圈294可抵接于加强块233的上端面。加强块233的第二端可穿出于风扇32罩壳,并可抵接于螺母295的上端面。第二电机轴293远离双轴电机主体291的一端可穿出于加强块233,并螺纹连接于螺母295。此外,加强块233的侧壁和风扇32罩壳的底壁之间可设有加强肋1651,以便提高加强块233的强度。此外,第一电机轴292和第一斜齿轮23之间的连接可参考上文的描述,在此就不再赘述。
可选地,从下到上风扇32罩壳的半径可逐渐增大,以便引导从下方进来的气体向风机的外侧和上方运动。
值得说明的是,风扇32也可为其他的结构,此处只是举例说明,并不对风扇32的结构做具体限定。只要风扇32能够使得从下方进入基体5的气体向上方运动即可。
下面对于上文提到的一种下方进风的空气净化装置如何引导气体流动进行阐述。
图34示出一种空气净化装置的爆炸图,如图34所示,基体5包括第二基壳54和底座51,第二基壳54可呈筒状设置,且第二基壳54的两端可呈开口设置。底座51的下端用于安装电机22和风机,底座51的上端用于放置水箱11。第二基壳54可套设于底座51的外侧,且第二基壳54和底座51之间可设有预设空隙,以便从第二基壳54下方进来的风,经预设空隙从水箱11的进风口进入到水箱11中。
为了方便描述,以箭头X的方向表示第二基壳54的宽度方向,以箭头Y的方向表示第二基壳54的长度方向,以箭头Z的方向表示第二基壳54的高度方向。示例性地,水箱11可沿第二基壳54的长度方向被从底座51上抽离。
图35示出图32的纵向的立体剖视图,如图34和图35所示,第二基壳54从下到上依次可包括承载段541、风机安装段542、底座51安装段。承载段541位于整个装置的最下方,用于承载装置中的双轴电机29、风机以及水箱11等的重量;风机安装段542对应于风机安装的位置,以便实现更好的进风效果;底座51安装段用于固定底座51;且底座51安装段也可用于引导气体进入水箱11。
关于承载段541:
可选地,图37示出第二基壳54的部分横向立体剖视图,如图34-图37所示,承载段541可呈空心的棱柱状设置,承载段541的外侧壁上可设有加强结构,以便提高承载段541的承载能力。示例性地,承载段541的侧壁上可设有沿轴向设置的第一承载凸缘5411,以便提高承载段541的侧壁承载轴向力的能力。其中,第一承载凸缘5411可设有多个,也可只设有一个。图34以多个第一承载凸缘5411为例示出,多个第一承载凸缘5411可均布于承载段541的侧壁上。
另外,承载段541的侧壁外周可连接有外周凸缘5412,以便对侧壁的周向进行加强。第一承载凸缘5411的两端可分别于外周凸缘5412相连,以便提高多个第一承载凸缘5411的整体性,进一步提高承载段541侧壁的受力。
此外,承载段541的侧壁的上端可设有支撑凹槽5413,第一承载凸缘5411的上端可伸入支撑凹槽5413内,以便提高承载凸起和承载段541的侧壁之间的连接强度。
可选地,承载段541内壁上还可连接有第二承载凸缘5414,第二承载凸缘5414可沿承载段541的轴线方向设置,以便进一步提高承载段541的结构强度。另外,从上到下,第二承载凸缘5414的截面逐渐减小。
关于进风格栅544:
可选地,承载段541上也可设有进风格栅544,以便隔离扇叶43111,防止扇叶43111对人的伤害。示例性地,进风格栅544可设置于承载段541内,且可位于风机的下方,以便使得气体进入,且阻挡人手的伸进。另外,进风格栅544上可设有过滤网,以便可以对气体进行初级过滤。其中,进风格栅544可包括呈环状设置的固定环5441,其中,固定环5441内可设有沿两个方向设置的第一格条5442以及第二格条5443。第一格条5442和第二格条5443可成相交设置,以便形成网孔,以便均布气体。
示例性地,如图所示,第一格条5442可沿承载段541的径向设置,第二格条5443可沿承载段541的周向设置。第二格条5443可设有一个或多个,当第二格条5443设有多个时,多个第二格条5443可呈同心设置。
值得说明的是,固定环5441可拆卸连接于承载段541。固定环5441可沿承载段541的长度方向穿设于承载段541内,以便在拆卸或安装时,固定环5441可沿着承载段541的长度方向运动,以便脱离或者穿设于承载段541。另外,为了拆卸或安装的一致性,可将水箱11脱离底座51的运动方向和固定环5441脱离底座51的运动方向设置成一致的。
图38示出第二基壳54在固定环5441部分的纵向剖视图,如图35和图38所示,示例性地,承载段541在宽度方向上的内壁上可连接有上凸缘5415和下凸缘5416,在承载段541的轴线方向上,上凸缘5415和下凸缘5416之间可设有预设间隙。固定环5441可伸进上凸缘5415和下凸缘5416之间,且固定环5441被限制在上凸缘5415和下凸缘5416之间,以便实现固定环5441的定位和安装。
需要说明的是,沿着固定环5441穿进承载段541的方向(图35和图34中箭头Y所指的方向),承载段541的长度方向的两端可依次设有第一侧壁和第二侧壁。也就是说,在将固定环5441安装到承载段541时,固定环5441穿过第一侧壁并连接于第二侧壁。
其中,如图38所示,上凸缘5415可位于下凸缘5416的下方,下凸缘5416可包括引入段54161、以及与引入段54161连接的定位段54162,引入段54161靠近承载段541的第一侧壁设置。沿着固定环5441穿进承载段541的方向,引入段54161可逐渐朝向上方倾斜。引入段54161可起引导作用,固定环5441进入承载段541时,可沿着引入段54161向上倾斜进入定位段54162和上凸缘5415形成的预设间隙中。
另外,如图37所示,上凸缘5415和下凸缘5416之间的承载段541侧壁上可设有卡块,固定环5441上可设有朝向固定环5441的内侧延伸的内凹陷5444。卡块可配合连接于内凹陷5444,以便实现固定环5441和承载段541的内壁之间的卡接固定。
此外,固定环5441伸进承载段541的一端可抵接于承载段541的第二侧壁,以便限制固定环5441的位置。值得说明的是,如图37所示,结合上文提到的第一承载凸缘5411和第二承载凸缘5414的描述,可将第一承载凸缘5411可设置在承载段541的宽度方向的侧壁的外侧,以便安装环的安装。可将第二承载凸缘5414设置在承载段541的第二侧壁的内侧,且第二承载凸缘5414上壳设有卡槽,固定环5441伸进承载段541的一端可卡接于卡槽,以便进一步实现固定环5441和承载段541的固定。其中,至少有一个第二承载凸缘5414可不设置卡槽,以便维持承载段541侧壁的结构强度。此时,固定环5441伸进承载段541的一端可抵接于第二承载凸起的内侧。
可选地,如图37和图38所示,固定环5441上可设有抽取凸起5445,抽取凸起5445可位于承载段541的外侧,以便用户抽取。其中,承载段541的第一侧壁上可设有插入槽5417,在承载段541轴线方向上,插入槽5417的开口大小可大于固定环5441的高度,以便固定环5441穿进插入槽5417。固定环5441可从插入槽5417穿进承载段541的内部。插入槽5417的下端面可齐平于引入段54161,以便固定环5441顺利从插入槽5417过渡到引入段54161上。
另外,固定环5441靠近承载段541的第一侧壁的一端可连接有卡位块5446,卡位块5446可抵接于插入槽5417的下端面,以便限制固定环5441靠近承载段541的第一侧壁处在插入槽5417中的位置。另外,卡位块5446可相对插入槽5417滑动,以便在固定环5441从承载段541脱离时,起引导作用。
值得说明的是,下方进风时,为了对含尘气体进行初级过滤,可在承载段541内设置初级过滤组件31。初级过滤组件31的结构可为上文提到的在进风格栅544上设置过滤网,也可为下文所阐述的结构。
示例性地,图39示出一种承载段541以及其上初级过滤组件31的部分横向立体剖视图,图41示出一种承载段541和初级过滤组件31的部分立体示意图;如图39和图41所示,承载段541上设有过滤槽,过滤槽沿承载段541的长度方向设置。初级过滤组件31包括过滤壳315以及设置于过滤壳315内的过滤芯316,过滤壳315上开有若干通孔,以便气体通过。初级过滤组件31沿承载段541的长度方向插入过滤槽内。过滤槽的槽底用于支撑过滤壳315,过滤槽的槽壁用于限制过滤壳315的周向位置。
可选地,过滤壳315上可设有抽拉提手317,以便为用户提供施力位置,便于向外抽出初级过滤组件31。
可选地,图40示出图39在G处的放大图,如图39和图40所示,承载段541的侧壁上可连接有上限制块318,上限制块318可抵接于初级过滤组件31的上端,以便限制初级过滤组件31在纵向方向的位置。示例性地,上限制块318可从过滤槽的槽壁朝向过滤槽的内部延伸。另外,上限制块318上可连接有导入块3181,导入块3181可相对于上限制块318朝向上方弯折。沿着初级过滤组件31伸入过滤槽的方向,导入块3181可逐渐朝向上限制块318且向下倾斜。此外,上限制块318的两个相邻侧壁可分别连接于相邻的两个槽壁上,以便提高上限制块318的连接强度。
可选地,图42示出图41在H处的放大图,如图41和图42所示,过滤槽的槽底上设有下限制卡块319,过滤壳315上壳设有下限制凹槽3151,下限制卡块319可卡接于下限制凹槽3151,以便实现过滤壳315和过滤槽之间的沿承载段541长度方向的定位限制。
可选地,当采用上文提到的过滤槽来安装初级过滤组件31时,第一承载凸缘5411可连接于承载段541宽度方向的两外侧,第二承载凸缘5414可连接于承载段541长度方向一外侧壁,且从上到下第二承载凸缘5414逐渐朝向承载段541的后端倾斜,以便能提高承载段541的稳定性。
综上所示,承载段541不仅可用于承载整个装置的重量,还可为初级过滤组件31提供安装空间。另外,承载段541的侧壁可限制出气体的第一进气通道。
下面来介绍风机安装段542。
如图35和图37所示,风机安装段542可套设于风机的外侧,风机安装段542可包括第一段、与第一段连接的第二段,风机安装段542的第一段可连接于承载段541的上端,从上到下,风机安装段542的第一段逐渐朝向风机安装段542的内侧弯曲。另外,风机安装段542的第二段可呈筒状设置,风机安装段542的第二段的截面半径小于承载段541的截面半径,以便在气体经过风机时,由于截面的改变使得,风机安装段542的第二段更贴于风机,使得气体向风机集中,以便风机对气体的引导。另外,风机安装段542的第一段可起衔接承载段541合风机安装段542的第二段的作用,以便气体向中间引导。
可选地,如图34所示,风机安装段542的外侧可连接有稳固板5421,稳固板5421可横跨风机安装段542的第一段合第二段,以便提高风机安装段542的承载能力。
可选地,如图34所示,风机安装段542上可连接有固定板545,固定板545可从风机安装段542的侧壁朝向外侧延伸。其中,可通过紧固件将固定板545和其它部件连接,以便风机安装段542和其它部件连接。
可选地,固定板545上设有通孔或者螺纹孔,固定板545上可设有孔位筋条5451,孔位筋条5451可绕着通孔或者螺纹孔的外周设置,以便提高通孔或者螺纹孔位置处的结构强度。
可选地,固定板545上也可设有外围筋条5452,外围筋条5452可绕着固定板545的的外周设置,以便提高固定板545的结构强度。
可选地,固定板545上还可设有纵横交错的稳固筋条5453,稳固筋条5453可具有至少两个方向,一个方向的稳固筋条5453可至少和一个另一方向的稳固筋条5453相交,以便进一步提高固定板545的结构强度。
可选地,孔位筋条5451、外围筋条5452以及稳固筋条5453,可两两相连接。也就是说,至少有一个稳固筋条5453和孔位筋条5451或者外围筋条5452相连,以便提高固定板545的整体性。
可选地,固定板545和稳固板5421之间可设有连接筋条5455,连接筋条5455可从稳固板5421朝向固定板545延伸,不仅可支撑固定板545,还可提高风机安装段542的整体性。
值得说明的是,承载段541或者底座51安装段也可设有上文所提到的固定板545,以便实现承载段541或者底座51安 装段和其它部件的连接。
综上所述,风机安装段542用于将气体逐渐向风机位置集中引导,以便提高风机的效率。另外,风机安装段542的侧壁可限定出第二进风通道34,第二进风通道34和第一进风通道33相连通。
下面来描述底座51的安装段。
如图35所示,底座51安装段可呈筒状设置,底座51安装段可位于底座51的外侧,底座51安装段内可设有固定片5431,固定片5431的两侧可分别连接于底座51的侧壁和底座51安装段,以便实现底座51和底座51安装段的安装。固定片5431可设有一个或多个。多个固定可均布于底座51的周向,以便提高底座51和底座51安装段连接时的稳定性,以及对气体进行均匀分配。
可选地,如图35所示,底座51安装段的截面半径大于风机安装段542的截面半径,以便增大气体的流动通道。示例性地,底座51安装段的下端可设有延伸板5432,延伸板5432可从底座51安装段朝向风机安装段542的第二段延伸,并连接于风机安装段542的第二段的上端。延伸板5432和底座51的侧壁之间设有预设间距5436,以便气体的通过。
另外,上文中提到的稳固板5421的上端面可连接于延伸板5432,以便提高底座51安装段和风机安装段542之间的连接强度。此外,固定片5431的下端可连接于延伸板5432的上端面,延伸板5432可对固定片5431做支撑,以便提高固定片5431的结构强度。
可选地,图36示出图35在I处的放大图,如图35和图36所示,风机安装段542的第二段可连接有导风凸起5422,导风凸起5422可朝向上方延伸,以便使得气体做向上的引导。
另外,如图35所示,底座51安装段的上端可超过水箱11的进风口的上端面,且可被出风罩41的下端以及水箱11的上端封盖,底座51安装段的上端,故进入底座51安装段的气体可从水箱11的侧壁开设的进风口进入水箱11中。值得说明的是,出风罩41和底座51安装段之间的连接,可参照下文中的描述。出风罩41和水箱11上端的描述可参考上文提到。
可选地,如图32和图34所示,底座51安装段靠近水箱11的后端的位置可设有进风凹陷5433,进风凹陷5433可朝向底座51安装段的内侧延伸。设置进风凹陷5433不仅可以减少第二基座的重量,还可对气体有引导作用。
示例性地,图43示出一种基体5的俯视图,如图34、图35以及图43所示,进风凹陷5433的内侧和底壁的侧壁连接,进风凹陷5433的外侧设置开口。进风凹陷5433可设有两个,两个进风凹陷5433的前端都位于水箱11的进风口的后端(由于进风口设置于水箱11的弧形部,故进风凹陷5433的前端可位于弧形部的后端,即进风凹陷5433的前壁对应于水箱11的竖直部),以便为气体提供进风空间。
可以理解地,延伸板5432、两个进风凹陷5433之间的底座51安装段、底壁的侧壁、水箱11的侧壁以及两个进风凹陷5433的前壁可限定出气体的第三进风通道35,第三进风通道35连通于第二进风通道34。故第三进风通道35应包含进风口所对应的位置。
可选地,两个进风凹陷5433可沿水箱11的轴线呈对称设置,以便基体5的平衡性和对称性。
可选地,进风凹陷5433内可设有加强板5434,以便提高进风凹陷5433的强度。
示例性地,加强板5434的两端可分别连接于进风凹陷5433的相对侧壁,加强板5434的一侧可连接于进风凹陷5433的底壁。加强板5434可沿第二基壳54的轴线方向设有多个,以便进一步提高进风凹陷5433的结构强度。
可选地,底座51安装段的上端可设有限位槽5435,水箱11的上端之至少部分位于限位槽5435上,以便限制水箱11上端的位置。示例性地,根据前文所提到的水箱11的上端设有放置凹槽112,放置凹槽112的外侧壁和底壁可抵接于限位槽5435,以便实现水箱11的上端的定位。
下面来介绍气体在第二基壳54内的流动通道。
如图35所示,外界气体在风机的作用下,进入第二基壳54的内部。气体经过承载段541的侧壁合围的第一进风通道33后,被其上的进风格栅544均匀分配,以及进风格栅544上的滤网过滤,进入斜流风扇32和风机安装段542的侧壁形成的第二进风通道34。从第二进风通道34出来后的气体进入底座51安装段的侧壁、底座51的侧壁所围的第三进风通道35内,并被固定片5431均匀分配后进入底座51安装段的侧壁和水箱11的侧壁和围成的第四进风通道36内。气体从第四进风通道36从水箱11的进风口进入水箱11内部。如此,完成气体在第二基壳54可的流动。
值得说明的是,当下方进风时,风机和电机22可相互独立,也就是说,风机也可与电机22不共用一个驱动源。下面对于这种情况进行简单描述。
图44示出又一种空气净化装置的立体示意图,图46示出图44的部分爆炸示意图,图47示出图44的纵向立体示意图,如图46和图47所示,另一种空气净化装置的基体5包括底座51和第三基壳55,第三基壳55套设于底座51的外侧,且用于支撑底座51。第三基壳55具有朝向下方设置的进风口,第三基壳55和底座51之间设有用于供气体通过的进风通道。
可选地,底座51的底端连接有隔离罩555,电机22包括电机主体222和电机轴221,隔离罩555套设于电机主体222的外侧且用于隔离电机主体222和进风通道内的气体。其中,电机主体222可参考上文悬挂安装在底座51上,以便减小振动。
可选地,隔离罩555和底座51可拆卸连接,以便对隔离罩555内的电机主体222进行检修。示例性地,隔离罩555和底座51的安装方式可参考上文提到的底座51和电机主体222的安装方式得到。
可选地,隔离罩555可包括第一段和第二段,隔离罩555的第一段抵接于底座51的底端且套设于电机主体222的外侧,隔离罩555的第二段位于电机主体222的下端且用于封盖隔离罩555的第一段。风机连接于隔离罩555的第二段。
其中,隔离罩555的第一段的顶端可设置定位槽,底座51的底端可连接有定位缘条。在底座51和隔离罩555的第一段连接时,底座51上的定位缘条对应插入定位槽中,以便实现底座51和隔离罩555的第一段的快速定位和安装。
另外,为了提高隔离罩555的第二段的结构强度,使其适应于风机的安装,则隔离罩555的第二段朝向底座51的一面可设有风机加强结构,风机加强结构的设置方式可参考上文得出。
此外,为了在隔离罩555的第二段上设置风机加强结构,可将隔离罩555的第一段和隔离罩555的第二段分别加工形成。示例性地,隔离罩555的第一段的底端和隔离罩555的第二段的顶端可通过上文提到的定位槽和定位缘条配合的方式定位和安装。
可选地,隔离罩555的第二段可通过紧固件悬挂安装于底座51。隔离罩555的第一段可通过紧固件悬挂安装于底座51,以便提高底座51和隔离罩555之间的连接强度;隔离罩555的第一段也可仅抵接于底座51的底端,并依靠隔离罩555的第二段和底座51之间的压紧力抵紧于底座51。
如图46和图47所示,第三基壳55可类比于第二基壳54,从下到上,也可包括风机安装段551、风机安装段552以及底座安装段553。
其中,风机安装段551可限定出第一进风通道33,风机安装段551上可设有上文提到的初级过滤组件,以便对进入第一进风通道33的气体进行初步的吸附过滤。风机安装段552可限定出第二进风通道34,风机安装段551的上端可连接有呈环状设置的第一引导凸起,第一引导凸起位于风机的下方,且朝向风机的内部弯曲,以便对气体进行引导,使其顺利进入风机中。
底座安装段553限定出第三进风通道35,第三进风通道35连通于水箱11的进风口。第三基壳55与第二基壳54的区别在于风机安装段552和底座安装段553分别单独加工。风机安装段552和底座安装段553之间设有隔离座554。隔离座554套设且连接于隔离套的外侧。隔离座554、风机安装段552以及底座安装段553相对且连通设置。风机安装段552用于支撑隔离座554,风机安装段552和隔离座554可通过紧固件连接在一起。隔离座554和底座安装段553可通过上文提到的定位槽和定位缘条配合的方式定位和安装。
可选地,隔离套和隔离座554之间设有第一支撑片556,第一支撑片556可将隔离套和隔离座554连接在一起。第一支撑片556可设有一个或多个,第一支撑片556可将隔离套和隔离座554之间的间隙分成若干区域,以便气体的通过以及对进入第三进风通道35的气体进行均分,使其均匀进入水箱11的进风口。
另外,第一支撑片556相对隔离罩555的轴向呈倾斜设置,且第一支撑片556的倾斜方向和风机的转动方向相同,以便气体的通过。此外,隔离罩555和隔离座554之间还设有第二支撑片557,第二支撑片557连接于第一支撑片556,以便提高隔离罩555和隔离座554之间的连接强度。从下到上,第二支撑片557朝向逐渐朝向远离第一支撑片556方向倾斜,以便第 一支撑片556和第二支撑片557之间形成锐角,以便电线的穿过和定位。
可以理解地,对于这种风机也可与电机22不共用一个驱动源地情况的气体的一种可能的进风流动路径为:外界含尘气体在风机的作用下,从第三基壳55下方的进风口即承载段551的进风口,进入第一进风通道33后可被初级过滤组件过滤。随后进入第二进风通道34,被第二进风通道34的风机引导向风机的周向流动并继续上升进入第三进风通道35,并通过第三通道进入水箱11内。
下面对下进风方式的出风部4进行描述:
首先,对于从下方进风的装置,风机可被设置在水箱11的下端,也可被设置在水箱11的上端。出风罩41是对流出水箱11的气体进行引导的部件。出风罩41一般设置在水箱11的上端,故风机可以有设置于出风罩41内和不设置于出风罩41内的两种形式。对于风机设置在出风罩41内的形式可参考上文得出。下面主要对出风罩41内未设置风机的情况来描述出风罩41的结构。
其次,按照水箱11的出风口的位置不同,出风罩41可有至少两种不同的设置方式。当然出风罩41的设置方式不限于此,下面只是举例说明。
在其中一种可能的实现方式是,如图34和图35所示,水箱11的上端可设有出风罩41,出风罩41可罩设于底座安装段543的上端。出风罩41可封盖水箱11和底座安装段543的上端开口。故位于底座安装段543和水箱11的上端的出风罩41可相当于上文提到的进风挡板。出风罩41可包括第一引导壳435以及连通于第一引导壳435的侧壁的第二引导壳436,第一引导壳435套设于水箱11的上端,且与水箱11的上端侧壁密封连接。示例性地,第一引导壳435和水箱11的上端之间设有密封件,密封件包括但不限于密封垫圈。
可选地,第二引导壳436从第一引导壳435朝向出风罩41的外侧延伸,第二引导壳436具有朝向出风罩41外侧的开口,该开口为出风罩41的出风口。另外,第二引导壳436上壳连接有呈环状设置的安装凸起413,安装凸起413朝向下方延伸。底座安装段543的上端壳嵌于安装凸起413内部。底座安装段543和安装凸起413密封连接,以便阻挡气体的露出。
可选地,从第一引导壳435的轴线到第一引导壳435的外周,第二引导壳436的上壁逐渐朝向上方倾斜,以便提高第二引导壳436的出风面积。
可选地,如图34所示,出风罩41的出风口可包括第一出风孔和第二出风孔,第一出风孔可设有两个,两个第一出风口相对出风罩41的轴线可呈对称设置。两个第一出风孔之间可设有两个第二出风孔,两个第二出风孔可相对出风罩41的轴线可呈对称设置,如此,以便将净化风引向了图中的左侧、右侧和后侧(或前侧)。
可选地,第一引导壳435可设有加强结构,以便提高出风罩41的结构强度。加强结构也可包括呈环状设置的加强凸起以及沿径向设置的径向凸起。
在另一种可能的实现方式是,图45示出另一种水洗部的示意图,如图44-图47所示,水箱11的进风口和水箱11的出风口可都设置于水箱的侧壁,且水箱11的出风口高于水箱11的进风口。水箱11的进风口和水箱11的出风口之间设有上文提到的第二挡水结构15,以便水箱11的进风口和水箱11的出风口不会相互影响。
可选地,基体5的顶端位于水箱11的进风口和水箱11的出风口之间,基体5的顶端用于引导进风通道内的气体进入水箱11的进风口。基体5的顶端即为底座安装段543的顶端,底座安装段543的顶端和底座51的顶端连接,以便形成第三进风通道35。可阻挡第三进风通道35内的气体从上升方向的流动,转为水平方向的流动,进而从水箱11的进风口进入水箱11中。
可选地,水箱11的顶端呈敞口设置,水箱11的顶端设有用于罩设于水箱11的敞口的罩盖44,且罩盖44用于引导水箱11内的气体向水箱11的出风口流动。其中,罩盖44上可设置导向凹陷441,导向凹陷441具有朝上的开口,从上到下,至少部分导向凹陷441的截面逐渐减小,以便从水箱11的中部流出的气体向水箱11的侧壁流动。
可选地,出风罩41套设于所述水箱11的出风口的外侧,出风罩41具有进风口和出风口,出风罩41的进风口连通于水箱11的出风口,从出风罩41的进风口到出风罩41的出风口,至少部分出风罩41在水箱11的轴线方向上呈逐渐外扩设置,以便增大出风罩41的出风口的出风量。此外,图48示出图44在出风罩的中间位置的横向剖视图,如图48所示,从出风罩41的进风口到出风罩41的出风口,至少部分出风罩41在水箱11的周向方向上呈逐渐收缩设置,以便使得气体向出风口集中流出。
可选地,图49示出一种出风罩和基体的立体示意图,如图49所示,出风罩41和基体5可通过紧固件连接在一起。出风罩41和基体5之间可通过上文提到的定位缘条和定位槽配合连接,以便实现出风罩41和基体5的定位和装配。
在上文所述的空气净化装置的基础上,空气净化装置可安装于外壳内,外壳设有外壳出风口,空气净化装置的出风口与外壳的出风口密封连接。示例性地,空气净化装置的出风端与外壳出风口的内壁之间设有密封圈。
一种空调内机,包括外壳、换热组件以及如上文的空气净化装置,外壳具有相隔离的换热风道和净化风道,换热组件设于换热风道内,空气净化装置设于净化风道内。换热组件和空气净化装置被配置成单独工作或者协同工作。一种空调器,包括空调外机以及如上的空调内机。一种新风系统,包括新风风道以及净化风道,净化风道内设置有如上的空气净化装置。

Claims (92)

  1. 一种空气净化装置,其特征在于,包括:
    水箱,具有进风口和出风口;
    风扇,用于驱动所述水箱外的空气从所述水箱的进风口进入所述水箱;
    水洗组件,设于所述水箱内,用于使所述水箱内的水清洗从所述水箱的进风口流向所述出风口的空气。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的进风口处设置有第一挡水结构;
    所述第一挡水结构位于所述水箱内,用于防止水滴从所述水箱的进风口处溅出所述水箱。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述第一挡水结构包括跨设在所述水箱的进风口出的多个挡水叶片;
    所述挡水叶片的横截面中至少有一部分倾斜于所述水箱的进风口设置;
    相邻两个所述挡水叶片之间构成供所述水箱外的空气进入所述水箱。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的进风口被设置在所述水箱的侧壁上。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的侧壁的一部分被配置成弧形,所述水箱的进风口被设置在所述水箱的侧壁的弧形部分上。
  6. 根据权利要求4或5所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的进风口被配置成沿所述水箱的侧壁的周向方向延伸的长条形,所述挡水叶片沿平行于长条形的所述进风口的长度方向、宽度方向或者对角线方向设置。
  7. 根据权利要求3-6任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,相邻两个所述挡水叶片在所述进风口上的投影具有重叠部分。
  8. 根据权利要求3-7任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述挡水叶片的横截面的倾斜方向与所述水洗组件的转动方向相反。
  9. 根据权利要求3-8任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述挡水叶片的下端具有将空气导向所述水箱底部的斜面。
  10. 根据权利要求3-9任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述挡水叶片的表面的至少一部分形成有能够引导空气流向的弧面。
  11. 根据权利要求3-10任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述第一挡水结构还设置有容纳腔,所述容纳腔用于收集所述挡水叶片拦截到的水滴。
  12. 根据权利要求3-11任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述第一挡水结构还包括位于相邻两个所述挡水叶片之间的挡圈和/或拦截片。
  13. 根据权利要求3-12任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述第一挡水结构还包括设于所述挡水叶片顶端的安装盖。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述安装盖具有导流槽,所述导流槽用于将所述安装盖上的水滴导流回所述水箱内。
  15. 根据权利要求13或14所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述安装盖设置有限位凸缘,所述水箱的内侧壁设置有用于容纳所述限位凸缘的限位凹槽。
  16. 根据权利要求3-15任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述第一挡水结构还包括设于所述挡水叶片底端的加强凸缘。
  17. 根据权利要求3-16任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述第一挡水结构还包括设于所述挡水叶片至少其中一侧的立壁。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述立壁的顶端与所述安装盖连接,所述立壁的底端与所述加强凸缘连接。
  19. 根据权利要求3-18任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述第一挡水结构的内侧还设有加湿过滤件,所述加湿过滤件用于对从所述第一挡水结构穿过的空气进行加湿过滤。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述加湿过滤件通过框架式结构的安装壳安装于所述第一挡水结构的内侧。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述安装壳包括外壳和内壳,所述加湿过滤件夹设在所述外壳和内壳之间限定的空腔内。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,贯穿所述安装壳的顶端设有进水孔。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水洗组件为能够将所述水箱内的水扬起并在离心力的作用下甩出以形成水幕的水洗组件;
    所述进水孔低于所述水洗组件所形成的水幕的平面。
  24. 根据权利要求21-23所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述安装壳的底端形成有挡水结构。
  25. 根据权利要求19-24任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述加湿过滤件为吸水棉网、海绵中的一种或者多种。
  26. 根据权利要求1-25任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的进风口处设置有初级过滤组件;
    所述初级过滤结构位于所述水箱外,用于对流向所述水箱进风口处的空气进行初级过滤。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述初级过滤组件与所述水箱的外侧壁之间具有间隙。
  28. 根据权利要求26或27所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述初级过滤结构包括过滤层以及支撑所述过滤层的过滤架,所述过滤架安装于所述水箱的进风口周围的外侧壁。
  29. 根据权利要求1-28任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的侧壁设有溢水孔,所述溢水孔的高度低于所述进风口的高度。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的外部设有与所述溢水孔连接的管状结构。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置还包括储水盒,所述管状结构用于将从所述溢水口溢出的水引入所述储水盒。
  32. 根据权利要求1-31任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱内设置有缺水提示组件和/或杀毒组件。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述缺水提示组件包括设于所述水箱内的浮子,报警器,以及与所述浮子和报警器通信连接的控制器。
  34. 根据权利要求32或33所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述杀毒组件包括设于所述水箱内的杀毒瓶,所述杀毒瓶内可加入消毒剂。
  35. 根据权利要求1-34任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水洗组件为能够将所述水箱内的水扬起并在离心力的作用下甩出以形成水幕的水洗组件;
    所述水洗组件包括可转动设置于所述水箱内的筒体,所述筒体能够在旋转力的作用下将所述水箱内的水扬起并从所述筒体上设置的喷水孔喷出以形成水幕;
    所述筒体包括呈锥形的第一段以及呈锥形的第二段,所述第一段和第二段通过一体成形的方式形成为一体结构。
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述筒体的第一段与第二段的连接处形成为台阶状结构。
  37. 根据权利要求1-36任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置还包括第二挡水结构,所述第二挡水结构设于所述水洗组件的下游,用于阻挡水滴沿空气流动方向穿过所述第二挡水结构。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的进风口设于所述水箱的侧壁,所述水箱的顶端具有开口;
    所述第二挡水结构设于所述水箱的顶端开口处。
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述第二挡水结构包括盖设在所述水箱顶端开口处的吸水件。
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述第二挡水结构还包括支撑架,所述支撑架设于所述水箱顶端开口处并能够供空气穿过,所述吸水件设于所述支撑架上。
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述支撑架被配置成网状结构,所述吸水件绷设于所述网状结构。
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述支撑架包括第一支撑网和第二支撑网,所述吸水件夹在所述第一支撑网和第二支撑网之间。
  43. 根据权利要求39-42任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述吸水件为单向或者多向阻水的多孔高分子材料。
  44. 根据权利要求1-43任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的进风口设于所述水箱的侧壁,所述水箱的顶端具有开口,所述开口作为所述水箱的出风口。
  45. 根据权利要求1-44任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水洗组件为能够将所述水箱内的水扬起并在离心力的作用下甩出以形成水幕的水洗组件;
    所述水箱的进风口和出风口均设于所述水箱的侧壁,并且所述水箱的进风口和出风口分别位于所述水洗组件所形成的水幕的两侧。
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的出风口靠近所述水洗组件形成的水幕设置。
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,当所述水幕的上方设置有第二挡水结构时,所述水箱的出风口靠近所述第二挡水结构设置。
  48. 根据权利要求1-47任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的侧壁至少一部分由透明材料制成。
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,由透明材料制成的部分所述水箱的侧壁上设置有刻度线。
  50. 根据权利要求1-49任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的侧壁上沿周向间隔设置有多个进风口。
  51. 根据权利要求1-50任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置设置有与所述水箱的出风口连通的出风罩;所述出风罩设置有至少一个出风口。
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述出风罩内形成有至少一个出风风道,每个所述出风风道均对应设置有至少一个所述出风口。
  53. 根据权利要求51或52所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述出风罩内设置有所述风扇。
  54. 根据权利要求51-53任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述出风罩的顶面设有加强筋。
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述加强筋为网状结构。
  56. 根据权利要求55所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述网状结构的加强筋设置有过线槽。
  57. 根据权利要求52-56任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置还包括加水流道,所述加水流道与一个所述出风风道连通。
  58. 根据权利要求57所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述加水流道内设置有单向板,所述单向板用于使得水流通过且阻挡气流通过。
  59. 根据权利要求58所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述加水流道形成为漏斗状结构。
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述单向板可转动的设于所述加水流道内。
  61. 根据权利要求57-60任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述加水流道的注水口靠近与该加水流道连通的所述出风风道的出风口设置。
  62. 根据权利要求61所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述加水流道的注水口位于与该加水流道连通的所述出风风道的出风口上方。
  63. 根据权利要求1-56任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置还设置有与所述水箱连通的加水流道。
  64. 根据权利要求63所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述加水流道的出水口位于所述水箱的侧壁和/或顶端。
  65. 根据权利要求51-64任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置安装于外壳内,所述出风罩安装于所述外壳。
  66. 根据权利要求1-65任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置安装于外壳内,所述外壳设有外壳出风口,所述空气净化装置的出风口与所述外壳的出风口密封连接。
  67. 根据权利要求66所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置的出风端与所述外壳出风口的内壁之间设有密封圈。
  68. 根据权利要求1-67任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置的出风口设置有出风格栅。
  69. 根据权利要求68所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述出风格栅的栅条斜向上设置。
  70. 根据权利要求1-69任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的下方设有基体,所述基体包括底座,所述水箱承载于所述底座上。
  71. 根据权利要求70所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水洗组件为能够将所述水箱内的水扬起并在离心力的作用下甩出以形成水幕的水洗组件;
    所述基体的底座设有用于驱动所述水洗组件转动以形成水幕的电机。
  72. 根据权利要求71所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱与所述基体可拆卸连接;
    所述电机的电机轴221设有第一联结器,所述水洗组件包括与所述第一联结器配合的第二联结器;
    当所述水箱与所述基体拆卸时,所述第一联结器与所述第二联结器分离。
  73. 根据权利要求71-72任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述电机与所述底座之间设有减震套。
  74. 根据权利要求70-73任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述水箱的侧壁和/或底部设置有供从所述基体拆卸所述水箱时的抓取结构。
  75. 根据权利要求74所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述基体的底座对应于所述水箱底部的抓取结构的位置设置有避让结构。
  76. 根据权利要求70-75任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述底座的顶面设有至少一个减震件。
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述减震件为橡胶减震垫。
  78. 根据权利要求70-77任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述底座的顶面间隔设有多个凸起。
  79. 根据权利要求70-78任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述基体还包括设于所述底座上的中空侧壁,所述中空侧壁具有与所述水箱的进风口连通的出风口。
  80. 根据权利要求79所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述基体的中空侧壁具有供安装所述水箱的安装口。
  81. 根据权利要求70-80任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述基体的底座具有用于容纳所述风扇的容纳空腔,所述容纳空腔与所述基体的中空侧壁联通。
  82. 根据权利要求81所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述基体的底座配置有单独用于驱动所述风扇的电机。
  83. 根据权利要求82所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述风扇和所述水洗组件通过同一个电机驱动。
  84. 根据权利要求83所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述电机具有同轴的第一电机轴和第二电机轴,所述第一电机轴用于驱动所述水洗组件,所述第二电机轴用于驱动所述风扇。
  85. 根据权利要求81-84任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述风扇的下方设置有安装于所述基体的底座的进风格栅。
  86. 根据权利要求85所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述底座的内壁设置有多个纵向加强筋,多个所述纵向加强筋中至少有一部分设置有用于容纳部分所属进风格栅的定位凹槽。
  87. 根据权利要求70-86任一项所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述空气净化装置安装于外壳内,所述基体安装于所述外壳内。
  88. 根据权利要求87所述的空气净化装置,其特征在于,所述基体的外表面设有加强筋。
  89. 一种空调内机,其特征在于,包括外壳、换热组件以及权利要求1-88任一项所述的空气净化装置,所述外壳具有相隔离的换热风道和净化风道,所述换热组件设于所述换热风道内,所述空气净化装置设于所述净化风道内。
  90. 根据权利要求89所述的空调内机,其特征在于,所述换热组件和所述空气净化装置被配置成单独工作或者协同工作。
  91. 一种空调器,其特征在于,包括空调外机以及权利要求89或90所述的空调内机。
  92. 一种新风系统,其特征在于,包括新风风道以及净化风道,所述净化风道内设置有权利要求1-88任一项所述的空气净化装置。
PCT/CN2020/089684 2020-05-11 2020-05-11 空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统 WO2021212564A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/089684 WO2021212564A1 (zh) 2020-05-11 2020-05-11 空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/089684 WO2021212564A1 (zh) 2020-05-11 2020-05-11 空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021212564A1 true WO2021212564A1 (zh) 2021-10-28

Family

ID=78271044

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/089684 WO2021212564A1 (zh) 2020-05-11 2020-05-11 空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2021212564A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023124493A1 (zh) * 2021-12-31 2023-07-06 海信(广东)空调有限公司 室外机

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6156085A (en) * 1993-08-23 2000-12-05 Honeywell Consumer Products, Inc. Filter air cleaner
CN104676790A (zh) * 2014-12-01 2015-06-03 苏州盟通利机电设备有限公司 能补充新风的水洗式空气净化器
CN208579461U (zh) * 2018-07-24 2019-03-05 河南远尘实业有限公司 可单独调节新风风量和净化风量的新风装置
CN210373805U (zh) * 2019-08-09 2020-04-21 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器
CN210463280U (zh) * 2019-08-20 2020-05-05 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器
CN210601998U (zh) * 2019-07-23 2020-05-22 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器
CN210832288U (zh) * 2019-07-17 2020-06-23 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器
CN111318115A (zh) * 2018-12-14 2020-06-23 广东美的白色家电技术创新中心有限公司 空气净化器
CN210832270U (zh) * 2019-07-22 2020-06-23 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6156085A (en) * 1993-08-23 2000-12-05 Honeywell Consumer Products, Inc. Filter air cleaner
CN104676790A (zh) * 2014-12-01 2015-06-03 苏州盟通利机电设备有限公司 能补充新风的水洗式空气净化器
CN208579461U (zh) * 2018-07-24 2019-03-05 河南远尘实业有限公司 可单独调节新风风量和净化风量的新风装置
CN111318115A (zh) * 2018-12-14 2020-06-23 广东美的白色家电技术创新中心有限公司 空气净化器
CN210832288U (zh) * 2019-07-17 2020-06-23 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器
CN210832270U (zh) * 2019-07-22 2020-06-23 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器
CN210601998U (zh) * 2019-07-23 2020-05-22 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器
CN210373805U (zh) * 2019-08-09 2020-04-21 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器
CN210463280U (zh) * 2019-08-20 2020-05-05 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 空气净化模块、空调室内机以及空调器

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023124493A1 (zh) * 2021-12-31 2023-07-06 海信(广东)空调有限公司 室外机

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7632340B2 (en) Air purifier for removing particles or contaminants from air
CN111578497B (zh) 出风结构以及空气净化装置
WO2021212564A1 (zh) 空气净化装置、空调内机、空调器及新风系统
CN206754002U (zh) 一种用于安装离心风机的风道壳体
KR101754474B1 (ko) 가습 기능을 가지는 공기청정기
CN113251543A (zh) 一种负压吸气式空气净化器
WO2018148940A1 (zh) 静电除尘装置和空气处理设备
CN217817290U (zh) 水幕空气净化器
CN105783127A (zh) 一种空气净化器
CN218120097U (zh) 水洗净化装置、空调器
CN111957132B (zh) 一种应用于空气净化装置的安装结构以及空气净化装置
CN212431170U (zh) 从下方进风的空气净化装置
CN113701298A (zh) 侧挡水结构以及空气净化装置
CN212701061U (zh) 水洗装置
CN212431167U (zh) 基体以及空气净化装置
CN212417353U (zh) 出风罩以及空气净化装置
CN213020162U (zh) 流道结构以及空气净化装置
CN213020161U (zh) 空气净化装置
CN212431168U (zh) 从下侧进风的空气净化装置
CN212431165U (zh) 侧挡水结构以及空气净化装置
CN113719948A (zh) 基体以及空气净化装置
CN113154604B (zh) 空气净化器以及空调
CN212253103U (zh) 壳体和空气处理设备
CN113634061A (zh) 出风罩以及空气净化装置
CN212253104U (zh) 过滤组件和空气处理设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20932540

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20932540

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1